OS/2 Shareware BBS: 5 Edit/05-Edit.zip/epmbk.zip/EPMUSERS.INF

OS/2 Help File | 1996-03-11 | 315KB | 10,019 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Preface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This manual describes the features of EPM. It is intended for the user who is
new to EPM. However, it is not meant to be a tutorial; it is assumed that the
user has had some experience with other editors. The information on how to use
the editor, therefore, is presented here in a reference or summary manner.
Tables and lists summarize key functions and commands. If you cannot find what
you are looking for, refer to the index for cross referencing.

EPM is programmable. Although a discussion of superficial tailoring is
presented herein, the macro language (the E language) which allows the editor's
programmability is not discussed in this manual at all. For information on the
E language, users should refer to The EPM Editor Technical Reference.

Note:  EPM will be used as an abbreviation for the Enhanced Editor throughout
       this document.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. Related Manuals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following manual contains information related to the E editor:

o The EPM Editor Technical Reference Manual
o Rexx Information in OS/2 2.0 Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. Special Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The term OS/2 is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.

The term Unix is a registered trademark of the American Telephone and Telegraph
Company.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Getting Started ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Basic information on the use of EPM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The details of the installation procedure vary, depending on how you got EPM,
but the basic concept remains the same.

IBM internal users should get EPM PACKAGE from OS2TOOLS. EPMnnnDL.FLS contains
the DLLs (where nnn refers to the version number); EPMnnnEX.FLS contains the
executables (*.EXE and *.EX), help files (EPM.HLP and EPMHELP.QHL), and a
README file; EPMDOC.FLS contains the online manuals (*.INF) for use with the
VIEW command and an index file (EPMTECH.NDX); EMACROS.FLS contains the macros.
All the FLSBIN files on the host must be downloaded in binary, then unpacked
using LOADRAM2.

Non-IBM users will have the EPMBBS package, either as a set of ZIP files from
the IBM OS/2 BBS's, from Compuserve, or via anonymous FTP from
software.watson.IBM.com or other anonymous FTP sites, *or* on a CD-ROM or
diskettes.  The diskettes may have the ZIP files; the CD-ROM has the files
already uncompressed into subdirectories.  The EPMBBS package includes an
EPMBBS.TXT file describing all the files included; only a subset will be
described here:  EPMDLL.ZIP contains the DLLs; EPMAPP.ZIP contains the
executables (*.EXE and *.EX), quick help file (EPMHELP.QHL), and index file
(EPMTECH.NDX); EPMHLP.ZIP contains the help file (EPM.HLP); EPMMAC.ZIP contains
the macros.

EPM can be used with OS/2 1.3 or above.  The IBM internal distribution includes
everything necessary; the external package would require the purchase of
additional DLLs in order to run on OS/2 1.3. When installing on OS/2 2.0 or
above, you can add this version of EPM as a separate package, or replace the
existing Enhanced Editor.  The subdirectories to be used when replacing the
existing Enhanced Editor are given in brackets; [\os2] refers to the \os2
directory on your OS/2 installation drive. The suggestions to not use the OS/2
directories apply only when not replacing the Enhanced Editor version of EPM.

Place the executables and quick help file in an EPM subdirectory on a hard
disk. (Here, we will assume D:\EDIT\EPM.)  [\os2\apps]

The DLL's are dynalink libraries, which should be placed in a subdirectory in
your LIBPATH. You can create a new subdirectory for EPM, or place the DLLs in a
generic \DLL subdirectory. We suggest you not use one of OS/2's directories.
[\os2\apps\dll]

Place the E macro files in an EMACROS subdirectory on a hard disk. (Here, we
will assume C:\EMACROS.)

The EPM.HLP help file should be placed in a subdirectory listed in your HELP
setting in CONFIG.SYS. You can create a new subdirectory for EPM, or place the
file in a generic \HELP subdirectory. We suggest you not use one of OS/2's
directories.  [\os2\help]

The INF files should be placed in a directory in your BOOKSHELF setting.

The NDX file can be placed in a directory in your EPMPATH or DPATH setting.

 1. Add EPM subdirectory to your PATH environment variable in your CONFIG.SYS
    file. For example:

        set path=d:\edit\epm;c:\os2;c:\os2\system; ...

 2. Create an EPMPATH environment variable in your CONFIG.SYS file specifying
    your EPM subdirectory.  For example:

        set EPMPATH=d:\edit\epm

    EPM will search for EPM.EX (the translated macros), and all other *.ex
    files it needs to operate, in:

    a. the current directory, and then in

    b. the directories specified by the EPMPATH environment variable, and then
       in

    c. the directories specified by the PATH environment variable, and then in

    d. the same directory as the editor's EPM.EXE file.

 3. Be sure the DLL files are referenced by the LIBPATH tag in CONFIG.SYS.

    Add your new EPM directory to the LIBPATH tag in your CONFIG.SYS file or
    copy all .DLL files to your C:\OS2\DLL subdirectory.

 4. If you always start EPM from the same place (so that EPM's current
    subdirectory is the one containing the .HLP files), then you can simply put
    the .HLP files in EPM subdirectory.  If not, then you must include the
    directory containing the .HLP files in your HELP setting in your
    CONFIG.SYS, so that the OS/2 Help Manager can find them.

 5. Optional Step:  Create a program reference.  For information on doing this
    see the OS/2 Online Help.

 6. Add EPM to STARTUP.CMD (Optional).

    You can add EPM to your OS/2 start up batch file. This will put EPM icon in
    the parking lot at the bottom of the screen, ready for use. To do this, add
    to your STARTUP.CMD:

            start d:\edit\epm\epm.exe /i
        (or whatever directory name you put EPM in).

 7. To make the changes take effect, especially if you've modified the LIBPATH
    statement, reboot your machine. Select Shutdown, or press Ctrl-Alt-Del
    simultaneously to reboot. Rebooting is not necessary if you did not change
    LIBPATH, but the changes to Path and addition of Epmpath to CONFIG.SYS
    won't be recognized until the next reboot unless you specifically type them
    at the OS2 command prompt.

Fini! You can run the standard EPM as is at this point. We strongly recommend
that new users become familiar with the many features of standard EPM before
customizing it.

If you are interested in customizing EPM, you will need to:

 1. Be sure EPM.E expects to include your changes in a compile.

    Changes to MYCNF.E, MYSTUFF.E and some other MY*.E files will be
    automatically included. See Adding New Features, Changing the Default
    Configuration, and The EPM Editor Technical Reference for specifics.
 2. Recompile EPM.E.

        ETPM EPM

    See the section Compiling Macros for more information on ETPM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. To Invoke the Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are a few ways of invoking EPM depending on how you installed it and from
where you wish to run it:

o From the Desktop Manager's Main Group (or other group)

  Assuming it's been added there: Double click on the name you gave it and
  watch EPM book icon appear at the bottom of the screen. Continue as in the
  next item.

o From the running editor icon on the desktop

  Assuming you've added EPM to STARTUP.CMD and the system's either been
  rebooted or you've explicitly run STARTUP: Double click on the icon and
  respond to the Enter File Name dialog box that appears by entering the file
  specification of the file to be edited. Use the file specification discussed
  in the next item.

  Note:  If you don't enter a name, an edit window will appear entitled
         .Untitled which you can name later.

o From the OS/2 command prompt.

    EPM filespec

  Filespec can be one or more file names. If a specified file doesn't exist it
  will be created. Multiple files can be loaded into a ring (more on the ring
  structure soon) by using wildcard characters or separating the filenames with
  spaces. For example:

    *.asm
    fileA.e fileB.e fileC.e
  In the first example, all the files with a extension of .ASM will be loaded
  into a ring. In the second example the fileA.e, fileB.e, and fileC.e will be
  loaded (or created if they don't already exist) into a ring.

Once you've invoked EPM, the file(s) will be loaded into EPM's own free-roaming
PM window. See Adding Files into an Edit Ring for information on seeing the
different files in a ring. See EPM Window Setup for more information on the
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. OS/2 Command Line Startup Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Several slash options can be given to EPM upon startup to initiate various
editor features. A list of these options follow:

/b: Starts EPM with a bare title bar - no system menu, min/max buttons, or ring
    buttons.  Intended for use when EPM is started as a child of a special
    application, this option is normally not specified by the user.

/e  Overrides the default loading of EPM.EX. A path and file name of a .ex file
    must immediately follow the '/e' option.

        EPM /eC:\MYEPM\MYEPM.EX

/f  Presents the File dialog before opening the edit window, to allow you to
    specify which files should be loaded.  (EPM 6 only.)

/h  Like the /i option, except that the icon is hidden when an edit window
    exists.

/i  Keeps EPM running even when all windows have been terminated.

/m  Forces a new instance of EPM book icon, even if another EPM book already
    exists. (/M stands for Multiple.) Useful from a command file, when you want
    to ensure that control will not return until after the edit session ends.
    Normally, if an EPM book icon exists, a call to EPM will pass the arguments
    to the existing book and immediately return to the calling OS/2 session.

/o  Directs EPM to skip over the first open file dialog and display the File
    list dialog by default. This affects the Open dialog called from EPM book
    icon, and the Edit, Open and Get dialogs called from an EPM edit window.

/r  Passes the arguments to the topmost edit window, if one exists, instead of
    starting a new window.  This allows you to add files to an existing ring
    from the OS/2 command line.

/w  Prepare for DDE conversation from the Workframe.

After removing any of the above options, the OS/2 command line argument is
passed to an internal Edit command. This means that you can pass EPM commands
to be executed as well as files to be edited on EPM command line. See the
description of the EDIT command for examples of passing commands to the new
edit window. Also see the description of the POSTME command for deferring the
setting of tabs and margins until after the default settings have been applied.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Basic Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section will cover all of the basic procedures necessary to begin editing
right away.  The procedures will be described in an abbreviated fashion.
Detailed descriptions of the procedures will be given later in the manual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. EPM Window Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The screen should be a familiar PM window that will look something like:

          This is the title bar. It contains the icon for the system (which
          also functions as a direct manipulation icon).  As well as the
          filename of the file being edited, two ring buttons, and the
          minimizing and maximizing arrows.
          This is the action bar which has six options listed (this can be
          changed). To use one of these functions, position the mouse over your
          choice and hit button one. Then position the mouse over your choice
          from within the menu and hit button one on your mouse again.
          Alternatively, you can press F10 or press and release the Alt key to
          reach the action bar.  Then use the arrow keys on your keyboard to
          reach the correct function. Press enter to choose that function. Use
          the arrow keys and enter in the same way to choose the menu function.
          This is the status line. It defaults to displaying the cursor line
          number, the total number of lines in the file, the cursor column
          number, the insert/replace mode of the cursor, the modify state (only
          displayed when the file has been modified) and the number of files in
          the ring. This can be altered. See the STATUS_TEMPLATE configuration
          option for more information on modifying the status line. The status
          line display can be turned off (or on) using the Status line option
          from the Frame Controls cascade in the Options action bar menu.
The Message line
          The message line is used to display editor messages. This line can be
          toggled off (or on) using the Message line option from the Frame
          Controls cascade in the Options action bar menu. If the message line
          has been toggled off, the messages will be displayed temporarily
          overlaying the status line. If the status line is not present, then
          the messages will be displayed temporarily overlaying the first line
          of the file area. If a line is overlaid, it will be restored with the
          next keyboard or mouse action taken.

          Note:  In the standard configuration, the Message Line has been
          toggled off. Thus messages will temporarily overwrite the Status Line
          as needed.


File Area
          This is where your file is displayed and can be updated. It is by
          default a white window with black text (this can be changed).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Basic Cursor Movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The easiest way to move around EPM file area is through the use of the
following cursor movement keys:

Up arrow
                    Moves cursor one line up.
Down arrow
                    Moves cursor one line down.
Left arrow
                    Moves cursor one character to the left.
Right arrow
                    Moves cursor one character to the right.
Home
                    Moves cursor to the beginning of the current line.
End
                    Moves cursor to the end of the current line.
Page up
                    Shifts view to page above current page, cursor stays at
                    same position on screen.
Page down
                    Shifts view to page below current page, cursor stays at
                    same position on screen.
Ctrl+Home
                    Moves cursor to top line of file.
Ctrl+End
                    Moves cursor to bottom line of file.
Ctrl+Page up
                    Moves cursor to top of screen.
Ctrl+Page down
                    Moves cursor to bottom of screen.
Ctrl+Left
                    Moves cursor to beginning of word left of cursor.
Ctrl+Right
                    Moves cursor to beginning of word to right of cursor.
Tab
                    Moves cursor to next tab stop.  (See Setting Tabs).
Shift-tab
                    Moves cursor to previous tab stop.  (See Setting Tabs).
Enter
                    Inserts a new line and moves the cursor under first
                    non-blank character of the previous line.
Ctrl-Enter
                    Moves cursor to column 1 of next line.

See Also:

o Cursor Movement- more information on cursor movement in EPM.
o Stream verses Line Mode- information on stream and line modes.
o Enter Key Behavior- information on configuring the enter key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Basic File Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How to open, close, print, save and rename files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. Opening a New Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are three ways to open a new edit ring:

o From the OS/2 command line:

    1. Type EPM
    2. Press the ENTER key.

o Using EPM book icon:

    1. Double click on the book icon.
    2. Hit OK.

o From an already existing edit ring:

    1. Open the File menu from the Action Bar.
    2. Choose Open .Untitled selection.

See Also:

o Opening Edit Rings- Details on opening edit rings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2. Adding Files to an Existing Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
       be turned on.  If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
       Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.

 To add files to an existing edit ring follow these steps:

 1. Select the edit window to which you wish to add the file.

    Note:  If none exists follow the procedure found in Opening a New Edit Ring


 2. Either:

   o Select Add File... from the File menu, or:

   o Press the F8 key.

 3. If the file you wish to load is found in the recently loaded file list in
    the newly created dialog box, load it by double-clicking on it with the
    mouse or by selecting it with the arrow keys and hitting ENTER, or if you
    know the name of the file you wish to load, you can type it in the Entry
    Field and press Enter. Otherwise:

    a. Press the File list... button.
    b. To load a file from the newly created window follow these steps:

       1. Change the current drive if necessary by moving to the drive window
          and typing the letter of the drive or selecting the drive by opening
          the pull down list by clicking on the down arrow with the mouse or by
          typing Ctrl+Down.
       2. Change the current directory if necessary by double clicking on the
          directory name with the left mouse button or by selecting the
          directory name with the keyboard and pressing Enter.
       3. Finally open the file by double clicking on the name in the file list
          with the left mouse button or by selecting the file(s) you want and
          pressing Enter.

          Note:  Further help on the file list box is available and can be
                 accessed by pressing the help button in the dialog box.


The dialog box is now clear and the file will be active in the current edit
window.

See Also:

o Adding Files to an Edit Ring- Details on adding files to an edit ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3. Closing Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To close the current file in the active edit ring either:

 1. Open the File menu.
 2. Choose Quit.

Or:

 1. Press F3.

Note:  If the file has been modified since your last save EPM will prompt you
       on whether you wish to save or discard your changes.  To continue press
       the appropriate button.

See Also:

o Closing the Current File- Details on closing files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4. Saving Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To save the current file either:

 1. Open the File menu.
 2. Choose the Save command.

Or:

 1. Press F2.

See Also:

o Saving the Current File- Details on saving files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.5. Renaming Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To rename the current file:

 1. Bring up the Rename dialog box either:

    a. Open the File menu.
    b. Choose Rename....

    Or:

    a. Press F7.

 2. Change the name in the entry field to the new name and press ENTER.

See Also:

o Renaming the Current File- Details on renaming files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.6. Printing Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print a file:

 1. Open the File menu.
 2. Choose Print File....
 3. Choose the appropriate printing device.
 4. Choose either Formatted Print to print to an OS/2 Print queue, or Raw ASCII
    text to print to an LPT or COM port.
 5. If you selected Formatted Print, you can select Options to choose either
    WYSIWYG or draft mode.
 6. Press the Print button.

Note:  When printing in WYSIWYG mode, it is important to realize that light
       foreground colors will not appear on a non-color printer.  To compensate
       for this, it is necessary to either change the foreground to a dark
       color (preferably black) or ensure that Monochrome is selected on the
       Print Options dialog. Background color is ignored when printing in
       WYSIWYG mode.

See Also:

o Printing the File- Details on printing.
o Direct Manipulation Using the File Icon- Printing using the file icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Marking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How to create the three types of EPM marks:

o Line marks
o Block marks
o Character marks


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. Line Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a line mark with the keyboard:

 1. Place the cursor on the line from which you wish to originate the mark.
 2. Press Alt+L.
 3. Place the cursor on the line where you want to end the mark.
 4. Press Alt+L.

To create a line mark with the mouse:

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the line where you want the mark to begin.
 2. Hold down the right mouse button.
 3. Drag the mouse until the lines which you wish to mark are highlighted.
 4. Release the mouse button.

Note:  Advanced marking must be activated.

See Also:

o Line Marks- Details on creating line marks.
o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Block Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a block mark with the keyboard:

 1. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to begin the
    block mark.
 2. Press Alt+B.
 3. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to end the
    mark.
 4. Press Alt+B.

To create a block mark with the mouse:

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you want the mark to begin.
 2. Hold down mouse button 1.
 3. Drag the mouse until the characters which you wish to mark are highlighted.
 4. Release the mouse button.

Note:  Advanced marking must be activated.

See Also:

o Block Marks- Details on creating block marks.
o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. Character Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a character mark with the keyboard:

 1. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to begin the
    mark.
 2. Press Alt+Z.
 3. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to end the
    mark.
 4. Press Alt+Z.

To create a character mark with the mouse:

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you want the mark to begin.
 2. Hold down the Ctrl key as well as mouse button 1 or just press mouse button
    3 if you have a 3 button mouse.
 3. Drag the mouse until the characters which you wish to mark are highlighted.
 4. Release the mouse button.

Note:  Advanced marking must be activated.

See Also:

o Character Marks- Details on creating character marks.
o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Mark Manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These are the basic keys for mark manipulation:

Key       Effect

Alt+C     Copy the marked block to the current cursor position.

Alt+D     Delete the currently marked text from the document.

Alt+M     Move the marked block to the current cursor position.

Alt+U     Remove the current mark.

Alt+A     Overlays block onto current cursor position and fills the origin with
          blanks.

Alt+O     Overlay the marked text onto the cursor poition.

See Also:

o Moving Text- Details on moving text.
o Copying Text- Details on copying text.
o Deleting Text- Details on deleting text.
o Removing Marks- Details on removing marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Setting Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the margins in EPM follow these steps:

 1. Press Ctrl+I to bring up the EPM Command Line dialog box.
 2. Type MARGINS followed by a space.
 3. Type the left margin followed by a space.
 4. Type the right margin followed by a space.
 5. Press ENTER.

For example, if you wanted to set the left margin for 10 and the right margin
for 75 then you would type the following at the EPM Command Line:

MARGINS 10 75

See Also:

o MARGINS command - More details on the MARGINS command.
o Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Setting Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Here's how to set tabs in EPM:

 1. Press ESC to bring up the EPM Command Line dialog box.
 2. Type TABS followed by the frequency of the tab stops.

For example, if you wanted to set tab stops at every 4 characters you would
type TABS 4 at the Command LIne.

See Also:

o TABS command- More details on the TABS command.
o Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Changing Font and Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the current font and/or color of selected text, follow this
procedure:

 1. Create a mark.  See Marking for information on creating marks.
 2. Either:

    a. Press Ctrl+Y

    Or:

    a. Open the Edit menu.
    b. Choose Style....

 3. Change the font by choosing one from the font list.
 4. Change foreground color by:

    a. Clicking on the Foreground radio button.
    b. Choosing a new color from the color list.

 5. Change background color by:

    a. Clicking on the Background radio button.
    b. Choosing a new color from the color list.

To change the current font and/or color of the current file, see Changing
Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. File Manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section contains detailed descriptions of all of the commands and
procedures which deal with the control of files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. File Fundamentals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM can be thought as existing on three separate levels.  The highest level
contains EPM program.  This top level controls and manages the Edit Rings which
are found on the second level.  Each of these Edit Rings has its own
Presentation Manager Window as well as control over a group of files which can
be considered the third level.  A schematic of these levels would look
something like this:

                              ΓòöΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòù
                              ΓòæEPMΓòæ
                              ΓòÜΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓò¥
               ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
               Γöé                   Γöé                Γöé
         ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ       ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ    ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
         ΓöéEdit Ring 1Γöé       ΓöéEdit Ring 2Γöé    ΓöéEdit Ring 3Γöé
         ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ       ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ    ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
        ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ             Γöé                Γöé
   ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ  ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ   ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ      ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
   ΓöéFILE1.DOCΓöé  ΓöéFILE2.DOCΓöé   ΓöéFILE3.DOCΓöé      ΓöéFILE4.DOCΓöé
   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ  ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ   ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ      ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

In this example EPM has three Edit Rings open. The first Edit Ring contains two
files, FILE1.DOC and FILE2.DOC. The second Edit Ring contains one file,
FILE3.DOC.  The third ring also contains one file, FILE4.DOC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Opening Edit Rings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The advantage of starting a new window is that you get a new instance of the
editor, with its own heap and mark. The disadvantage is that each new window
takes about 70K of memory. We recommend keeping related files together in a
window. Unrelated files (different projects) should be put in separate windows,
so you can shrink or hide projects as you switch between tasks.

When editing many files this feature helps group like files.  For instance,
when working on several different projects, each project can have its own ring
containing all its own related files. As many rings as needed can be used.

There are three ways in which you can open new edit rings.  This section will
cover each in detail.

 1. From the OS/2 Command Line:  To do this simply type EPM at the prompt.  If
    you wish to load files directly into the new ring from the prompt, type the
    names of the files as arguments.  It is possible to load multiple files
    into the ring using wildcards or by listing each individual file.  All of
    the following examples are valid file arguments:

        EPM FILE1.DOC
        EPM FILE2.*
        EPM FILE?.TXT TEMPFILE D:\TEXT\*.*

    Several slash options can be given to EPM upon startup to initiate various
    editor features.  For a list of these and their descriptions see OS/2
    Command Line Start Options.

 2. Using EPM book icon:  It is possible to create a new edit ring from EPM
    book icon by double clicking on it with the mouse.  The Open dialog box
    will now appear, unless the /o option was specified when EPM was started,
    in which case File List dialog box will appear.

 3. From an active edit ring  From an open edit ring it is possible to create a
    new edit ring in the following ways:

   o Using the Open Command:  The Open command can be activated in three ways:

       a. From the EPM Command Line:  See Open command description for details
          on this.
       b. From EPM File menu:  From EPM File menu the following items will open
          a new edit ring:

         - Open .Untitled:  Will create the new edit ring with an unnamed file.
         - Open...:  Will bring up the Open dialog box if activated or the File
           List dialog box otherwise.

       c. Using the keyboard:  Type Ctrl+O or F5.  This has the same effect as
          selecting the Open... menu item.

Another way of opening edit rings is though the use of the OPENPATH command.
The OPENPATH command allows you to search a path variable for a file.  For
example, if you wanted to serarch for the file TEST.E which you know is in one
of the directories of the PATH variable, you would enter this command:

OPENPATH TEST.E PATH

If the system variable is not given OPENPATH will default to the EPMPATH,
unless the file given has a CMD extension, when it will default to the PATH
variable.  The OPENPATH command can be abbreviated to OP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Adding Files to an Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are three ways to add new files to an EPM Edit Ring:

 1. Using the EPM Command Line:  The Edit command.

 2. Using the File menu:  Choose the Add File... menu item.  This will bring up
    the Add File dialog box if activated or the File List dialog box otherwise.

 3. Using the keyboard:  Press F8.  This has the same effect as using the file
    menu.

Another way of adding files is though the use of the EPATH command.  The EPATH
command allows you to search a path variable for a file.  For example, if you
wanted to search for the file TEST.E which you know is in one of the
directories of the PATH variable, you would enter this command:

EPATH TEST.E PATH

If the system variable is not given EPATH will default to the EPMPATH, unless
the file given has a CMD extension, when it will default to the PATH variable.
The EPATH command can be abbreviated to EP.

When adding files it important to note the current status of the BROWSE
command.  If BROWSE is turned on, you will be unable to modify the file.  To
determine the state of the BROWSE variable type either BROWSE or BROWSE ? at
the EPM Command Line.  To activate BROWSE mode enter BROWSE ON.  To turn off
the feature use BROWSE OFF.

Note:  To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
       be turned on.  If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
       Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. Switching between Files in an Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When multiple files are loaded into the editor, you see only one file at a time
on your screen.

There are three ways of switching between files in the current edit ring:

 1. Scrolling through the files using the keyboard: You can view one of the
    other files that are already loaded by pressing the Ctrl-P, F11, Ctrl-N,
    F12 key.

    When multiple files are loaded into the editor, they are placed in a ring
    structure. This enables you to move through the ring of files forward
    (Ctrl-N[ext] or F12) and backward (Ctrl-P[revious] or F11), viewing all the
    files and always returning back to your original place. For example, assume
    that you have invoked the editor with the following filename specification:

        fileA.e fileB.e fileC.e
    When EPM window comes up, you will be viewing fileA.e. If you press F12 or
    Ctrl-N, you will see fileB.e, and you can see fileC.e by pressing F12 or
    Ctrl-N again. If you press the key once more, you will be returned to your
    view of fileA.e.

 2. Selecting the current file using the ring list:  Open the List Ring dialog
    box using either of the following methods:

   o Choosing the List Ring... item from the Options menu.
   o Typing Ctrl+G

    Then choose the file which you wish to activate from the files listed.

 3. Using the Ring Buttons: These are the ring buttons:

    They are located on the Title bar.  The ring buttons can also be used to
    switch between files.  The left hand ring button switches to the previous
    file in the ring and the right hand one switches the next file.

Note:  To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
       be turned on.  If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
       Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Saving the Current File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To save the current file you may use any of the following procedures:

o Using the EPM Command Line:  Enter SAVE at the EPM Command Line.

o Using the File Menu:  There are two techniques for saving from the File menu:

    1. Save:  Saves the file.
    2. Save as...:  Allows the user to rename the file before saving by
       bringing up the Save as dialog box.

o Using the keyboard:  Type F2.

EPM also contains an AUTOSAVE which will save the file after a set number of
modifications have been made to the file.  To view the current autosave
settings type AUTOSAVE at the EPM Command Line, or select Autosave... from the
Options menu. The autosave value is the number of modificatinos which must be
made to the file before an autosave is preformed. Name is the name of the
current autosave file.  There are five options which can be used with the
autosave command.  They are as follows:

Option                   Effect
AUTOSAVE ####            Sets the number of modifications before an autosave.
                         Setting the number of modifications to 0 turns off the
                         autosave feature.
AUTOSAVE ON|OFF          Turns the autosave feature on or off.
AUTOSAVE ?               Opens a dialog box containing the number of
                         modifications between autosaves and the name of the
                         current autosave file as well as the option to list
                         all of the files in the autosave directory.
AUTOSAVE DIR             Lists all of the files in the autosave directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Closing the Current File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two different manners for closing files Quiting and Filing.  Quitting
simply closes the file, whereas filing will save the file then close it.

They can be performed as follows:

o Quitting:  There are three different procedures for quitting:

    1. From the EPM Command Line:  Using the QUIT command.
    2. From the File menu:  Choose Quit.
    3. Using the keyboard:  Press F3.

o Filing:  There are several ways for filing:

    1. From the EPM Command Line:  Using the FILE command.
    2. From the File menu:  Choose Save and quit.
    3. Using the keyboard:  Press F4.

In each of these cases, if the file has been modified since the previous save a
Quitting file dialog box will appear which is self explanatory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Direct file manipulation using the File icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File icon is located to the left of the title bar. It can be used to
achieve the following:

o Print the current file.
o Copy a file to another edit window.
o Create another edit window containing your file.
o Copy files to a folder on the desktop.
The File icon is manipulated in the following way:

Select the file icon by pointing to it with your pointing device (mouse) and
pressing button 2. Keeping button 2 down, move the mouse pointer over either:

o The Print Manager icon, to print the file.
o An EPM edit window, to copy the file.
o EPM icon, to create another edit window containing your file.
o A folder on the desktop, to copy the file to that directory.

Note:  When dragging EPM file icon to the printer or to the File Manager, the
current state of the file in memory will be printed or saved. When dragging EPM
file icon to another EPM edit window or to the EPM book icon, the file loaded
will be the file that exists on disk. Any changes made since the file was
loaded or last saved will not be seen in the new copy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. Renaming the File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you wish to rename the current file there are four ways in which to do it.
All of the following are acceptable ways to rename files:

 1. From the EPM Command Line:  Issue the NAME command or the RENAME command.

 2. Through the File Menu:  Open the File menu then choose Rename....  To
    change the name of the file replace the name in the dialog box with the new
    name and press ENTER.

 3. Using the mouse:  Place the mouse cursor over EPM title bar then
    double-click with the right mouse button.  The title bar will have now
    turned white and you can now change the name of the file.

 4. Using the keyboard:  Press F7.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. Printing a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print in draft mode follow these steps:

 1. Bring up the EPM Command Line.

 2. Type PRINT.

 3. Press the ENTER key.
This procedure will print the marked text to the default printer.  If no text
is marked this procedure will print the entire file to the default printer.

If you wish to print to a printer other than the defaut follow add enter the
destination of the file as a parameter of the PRINT command. Valid destinations
are LPT1: - LPT9:

For example, if you wanted to print to LPT2: you would type this at the EPM
Command Line:

PRINT LPT2:

An alternate way to print the file is:

 1. Open the File menu from the Action Bar.

 2. Choose Print file....

This procedure will bring up a dialog box.  In the dialog box first choose
whether you want to print formatted text or raw ASCII text.  Next choose the
printer queue or printer port to which you wish to send the output. For
formatted output, you can choose between draft and WYSIWYG printing mode.

Warning: If printing in WYSIWYG mode the foreground text must be in a dark
color, preferably BLACK, or Monochrome must be selected as a print option..


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. Appending a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To append a marked section of text from the current file, or the entire file to
the end of a file which has not been loaded into the editor use the APPEND
command.  This command is used in the following manner:

APPEND filename

Where filename is the name of the file to which you wish to append the text.
If a mark exists in the current file then just the text in this mark will be
appended, otherwise the whole file will be.  If the file given by the argument
does not exist the command will create it.  The PUT can be used as a synonym
for the APPEND command.

A related command is the GET command. The GET command allows you to load the
contents of a file into the current file.  For example, if you wished to add
the file PYTHON.NEE into the current file you would enter:

GET PYTHON.NEE

This will load the file beginning at the current cursor location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. Locking the File in a LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When using a LAN it may be necessary to lock files on occasion.  To do this you
can use the LOCK, or the /k option when loading the file. Files are
automatically unlocked when a FILE or QUIT are given, but can be manually
unlocked using the UNLOCK command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. Searching for Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It is possible to search for files using the LIST command. The syntax for this
command is as follows:  LIST filespec

Use LIST to load a list of file names that match filespec. If filespec includes
a path, then that directory is used as the starting point; if not, the current
directory is used.  Both the starting directory and any subdirectories are
searched for matching files.  This may take a significant amount of time (a
minute or more) if you name a filespec that qualifies an entire hard disk, such
as

list \*.*
 Once you have the list, you can place the cursor on the name of a file, and
then press Alt-1 to edit that file.

FILEFIND and FINDFILE can be used as synonyms for the LIST command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Marks and Marking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information of the creation, use and manipulation of marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Marking Basics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A mark is a way of performing the same operation on a group of characters. For
example, if you wanted to move a paragraph from one part of a file to an other,
you would create a mark which encompassed all of the characters in that
paragraph, then you could move the whole paragraph to the new location.

EPM has two distinct marking modes: Basic and Advanced.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Basic Marking Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM Basic marking mode acts like the CUA marking used in PM entry fields. It
should be familiar to all OS/2 users, but it lacks the power of the Advanced
Marking Mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Creating Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It is possible to create marks in the basic marking mode with the mouse or the
keyboard.

Using a mouse:

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the first character which you wish to include
    in the mark.
 2. Depress the left mouse button.
 3. Drag the mouse to the last character to be included in the mark.
 4. Release the left mouse button.

Using the keyboard:

 1. Place the text cursor to the left of the first character to be marked.
 2. While holding down the Shift key, use the cursor keys to extened the mark.

    Note:  The cursor keys which must be used are the cursor keys which are NOT
           part of the numberic key pad.


The mark can be removed by moving the text cursor to another location using
either the mouse or the cursor keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Copying Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy text to a new location in Basic Marking Mode use the following
procedure:

 1. Create a mark.  For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
 2. Copy the text into the clipboard by pressing Ctrl+Ins, by selecting Copy
    from the Edit menu or by entereing the COPY2CLIP
 3. Move the cursor to the location where you wish to copy the text to.
 4. Copy the text from the clipboard by pressing Shift+Ins, by selecting Paste
    from the Edit menu or by using the PASTE command at EPM Command Line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Moving Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move text to a new location in Basic Marking Mode use the following
procedure:

 1. Create a mark.  For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
 2. Cut the text into the clipboard by pressing Shift+Del, by choosing Cut from
    the Edit menu or by entering CUT command at the EPM Command Line.
 3. Move the cursor to the location where you wish to copy the text to.
 4. Copy the text from the clipboard by pressing Shift+Ins, by choosing Paste
    from the Edit menu or by using the PASTE command at EPM Command Line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. Deleting Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete text using Basic Marking Mode:

 1. Create a mark.  For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
 2. Press Del.

    Note:  Pressing any other text key when an area is marked will replace the
           marked area with that character.  Pressing Ctrl+Ins will replace the
           marked text with the text found in the clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Advanced Marking Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM Advanced Marking mode has four basic types of marks: block, line, word and
character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Creating Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a mark in the Advanced Marking mode you must first decide what type
of mark you wish to make.  There are four types of marks:

o Block Mark
o Line Mark
o Word Mark
o Character Mark


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.1. Creating a Block Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating a Block Mark:

To create a block mark you may use either the mouse or the keyboard.  To create
a block mark using the mouse follow these steps:

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the position where you wish to begin the mark.
 2. Hold down mouse button 1.
 3. Drag the mouse until the area which you wish to mark is enclosed in the
    highlighted box.
 4. Release mouse button 1.

If you do not have a mouse or if you prefer using the keyboard, you can use the
following procedure:

 1. Place the text cursor where you wish one of the corners of the block mark
    to be located.
 2. Press Alt+B.
 3. Move the text cursor to the position where you want the opposite corner of
    the block mark to be.  For example, if the first postion was meant to be
    the lower-left corner of the block mark, the second should be the location
    of the upper-right corner.
 4. Press Alt+B.

    Note:  If a block mark already exists when Alt+B is pressed, the block mark
           will be changed so that the current cursor location and the
           upper-left corner of the old block mark are used as the anchor points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.2. Creating a Line Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating a Line Mark: Line marks can also be created using either the mouse or
the keyboard. Using the mouse:

 1. Place the mouse cursor on the line from which you wish to originate the
    line mark.
 2. Press mouse button 2.
 3. Drag the mouse cursor to the line where you wish end the mark.
 4. Release mouse button 2.

Using the keyboard:

 1. Move the text cursor to the line where you want to begin the line mark.
 2. Press Alt+L.
 3. Move to the line which you desire to end the block.
 4. Press Alt+L.

    Note:  If Alt+L is pressed when a line mark already exists, the current
           line mark will be extended in the following manner: if Alt+L is
           pressed on a line above the first line in the current mark, the mark
           will be extened from the bottom the current mark to the current
           line, otherwise it will be extened from the top of the current mark
           to the current line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.3. Creating a Character Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating a Character Mark:

Using a mouse

 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you choose to begin the
    mark.
 2. Hold down Ctrl+mouse button 2 (or just press mouse button 3 if you have a
    3-button mouse).
 3. Drag the mouse to the location where you wish to end the mark.

There are two different ways to create character marks using the keyboard. The
first is to simply hold down the Shift key and move the cursor using the
non-numeric cursor keys to extend the mark.

The second manner of creating character marks with the keyboard is as follows:

 1. Move the text cursor to the character where you wish to begin the mark.
 2. Press Alt+Z.
 3. Move to the character where you wish to end the mark.
 4. Press Alt+Z.

    Note:  If a character mark already exists when Alt+Z is pressed the mark
           will be created as follows:  If Alt+Z was pressed on a character
           which is located after the first character in the current mark, the
           mark will enclose all of the characters between the beginning of the
           existing  block to the current cursor position.  Otherwise, the mark
           will be made such that it will extend from the end of the current
           block to the current cursor position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.4. Creating a Word Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating a Word Mark:

Using the keyboard:

 1. Place the text cursor on the word which you wish to mark.
 2. Press Alt+W or enter MARKWORD at the EPM Command Line.

Using the mouse:

 1. Double-click mouse button 2 on the word you wish to mark.

Note:  Word marks can be extended as if it were a block mark.

A word is assumed to extend from the current character left and right with a
space on the beginning or end of the line is encountered.

This is not always satisfactory.  For example, when writing a C program, you
might have:

result=function(parameter1,parameter2);

and want to mark the first parameter; Alt+W would mark the entire function call
(because it doesn't contain any spaces).  A variety of word mark is available
that picks out C language tokens:

Using the keyboard:

 1. Place the text cursor on the word which you wish to mark.
 2. Press Ctrl+W.

Using the mouse:

 1. Press and hold Ctrl and double-click mouse button 2 on the word you wish to
    mark.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Copying Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To copy text to a new location it is necessary to first create a mark. Once you
have done this, to copy the mark, move the cursor to the location where you
wish to insert the copy and press Ctrl+C or hold down the Ctrl key and mouse
button 2 while the mouse pointer is within the marked area, then drag the mouse
to the new location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Moving Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move marked text move the text cursor to the location where you wish to
insert the text and press Alt+M.  An alternate way is to use the mouse.  To do
so, first place the mouse pointer over the mark.  Depress the right mouse
button.  Drag the mouse so that the cursor is over the location where you wish
to place the text.  Release the mouse button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.4. Deleting Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a mark, press Alt+D.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.5. Mark Overlay ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It is possible in EPM to overlay a mark onto another location, i.e. move or
copy a marked area to another location, while replacing anything which might
have been there.  There are two key which are used to perform this operation,
Alt+A and Alt+O  The difference between the two is that Alt+A fills the
originally marked area with blanks, whereas Alt+O does not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.6. Removing Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove any existing marks type Alt+U or double-click the left mouse button.

Note:  EPM only allows you to have one mark in existence at a time, so you must
       remove the mark before making a new one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.7. Scrolling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To scroll the text in the current mark to the left or right use Ctrl+F7 and
Ctrl+F8, respectively.

Note:  Characters which are scrolled past the left side of the mark are lost.
       They will not return if you attempt to retrieve them by scrolling back right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.8. Adjusting a Paragraph to New Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the margins, issue the margins command from the command line dialog box.
For example, to set the left margin to the first column, the right margin to
the seventy-fifth column, and the paragraph indent to 5 spaces, issue the
following command:

margins 1 75 5

Reflowing a paragraph that's followed by a blank line (or end of file) is easy;
EPM knows that the paragraph has ended when it sees the blank line. EPM also
recognizes script tags (a period in the first column) as an end of paragraph.
Simply move the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph and press Alt-P.

If the paragraph is not terminated with a blank line or end of file, you must
tell EPM where to stop by marking the paragraph as follows:

 1. Move the cursor to the beginning of a paragraph and press Alt-L.
 2. Move the cursor to the end of the paragraph and press Alt-L. EPM will
    highlight the text you have marked.
 3. Now you can press Alt-P to adjust the marked paragraph to the current
    margin settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Procedures Valid for both Marking Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Procedures which are valid for both marking modes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. Filling Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Filling a mark means that you are turning every character within that mark to
the character specified in the command.  To fill a mark you can either press
Alt+F or enter the FILL command at the EPM Command Line.

For example, if you wanted to fill the marked area with the character A you
would either press Alt+F then enter A in the newly created dialog box, or
entering the following at the EPM Command Line:

FILL A


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. Simple Math Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ADD and MULT commands cause EPM to add and multiply, respectively, all of
the numbers in a mark.  The answer will be placed in the line below the mark.
These commands will fail if there are characters present in the mark.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. Sorting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Entering SORT at the EPM Command Line causes EPM to sort the lines in the
marked area, or the entire file if no area is marked.  If a block mark exists,
the marked columns will be used as the sort key; if not, the first 20 columns
of each line will be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. Uppercase/Lowercase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you wish to set all of the letters in a marked area to either their
uppercase or lowercase characters enter the UPPERCASE or LOWERCASE command at
EPM command line.  As a short cut, the Ctrl+F3 and Ctrl+F2 key combinations can
be used for uppercase and lowercase, respectively.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. Reflowing Marked Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alt-R key lets you reflow a section of text to a new shape. It's typically
used to reformat a special paragraph (like a figure caption or example) to new
margins without changing the standard margins.

First mark the text to be reformatted (with any type of mark), then press
Alt-R.  You will be prompted to mark the new block - the shape you want the
block to be reflowed into. Move the cursor around and press Alt-B twice to
define the new area, in the same place as the original text or elsewhere in the
document. Then press Alt-R again and the text will be reflowed. The space from
which the text came will be filled with blanks.

Alt-P will reflow a block marked area into the shape and size of the marked
area, ignoring the margin settings. In other words, with a block mark, Alt-P
behaves as if you marked a block, pressed Alt-R, and remarked the same block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.6. Centering Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To center the text in the current mark type Alt+T.  If there is no text
currently marked the text is centered between the current margins.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.7. Executing Marked Lines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

By pressing Alt+0 (Alt+Zero) or Alt+= EPM will execute the current line, or all
marked lines, as a command.  If a line mark exists, you will be asked if you
wish to execute all marked lines.  Select Yes to execute each marked line as
though it had been entered in the EPM command line dialog, select No to execute
only the current line, or select Cancel to cancel the command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Text Layout and Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM has several variables which define how the text in the edit window looks.
For example, tabs, margins, color, and font.  This section will describe how to
adjust these and related attributes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Font and Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM allows you to change the physical appearance of all of characters in a
mark.  To do this it is first necessary to mark an area of text. For details on
doing this, see either Advanced Marks or Basic Marks, depending on which
marking mode you are currently working with.

After creating a mark, the next step in changing the font and color of text is
to bring up the style dialog box.  To do so, either press Ctrl+Y or choose
Style... from the Edit menu.

To change the current font, select a new one from the Font name combination
box.  There are several options which can affect the outcome of the font.  The
font can be made bold, italicized, outlined, underlined, or struckout by
pressing the appropriate button.  The font size can also be changed using the
Font size combination box.

Note:  The block mark is rectangular with respect to the number of characters
       within it, not by physical size.  Therefore, if a proportional font is
       used the block mark will not appear to be rectangular.

Both the foreground and background color of the text can be changed using the
style dialog box.  To change either first choose it by clicking on the
appropriate radio button, then choosing the new color from the Color
combination box.

Note:  When printing in WYSIWYG mode, it is important to realize that light
       foreground colors will not appear on a non-color printer.  To compensate
       for this it is necessary to change the foreground to a dark color
       (preferably black), or to select Monochrome from the printer Options
       dialog.  Background color is ignored when printing in WYSIWYG mode.

The current text appearance is located in the box located at the top of the
dialog box.  This allows you to see the tentative style before you make the
change permanent.

To make the changes in style press the Apply button.

Note:  Using mixed colors can slow down painting of the screen a little, and
       using mixed fonts can slow it down quite a bit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Defining Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It can be useful on occasion to name and then save the current text style so
that it can be easily called up later and reused.  To do this it is first
necessiary to mark an area of text.  For details on doing this, see either
Advanced Marks or Basic Marks, depending on which marking mode you are
currently working with.  Next, call up the style dialog box.  To do so, either
press Ctrl+Y or choose Style... from the Edit menu.

Next, adjust the style to the appearance which you wish to save.  For
information on doing this see Font and Color.

To register the current style, type the name by which you wish to call the font
in the Style name entry field, then press the Register button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Setting Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in the tabs command (on the command line dialog) and press the ENTER key.
The tabs command has the following syntax:

tabs  [t1 [t2 [t3 .. t32] ] ]

Examples:

  tabs 1 9 17 25 33
  tabs
  tabs 4

The first example will set the tabs to the columns 1, 9, 17, 25, and 33. The
second example (the tabs command with no arguments) will display the current
tab settings and allow them to be changed. In the third example, the tabs are
set every four spaces at 1 5 9 13 ... 125.  See the TABS command for more
information.

EPM has another type of tab which uses the beginning of the words in the
previous line as tab stops.  To put EPM into this mode the MATCHTAB must be
used. Entering MATCHTAB will cause EPM to display the current status of the
setting.  ON means that the function is active and the proceeding line is used
for tab stops.  OFF means that the set tabs will be used.  To change the
setting follow the command by the new value.  For example, MATCHTAB ON will
turn it on.

It is also important to be aware of the TABKEY command.  This toggles whether
or not a tab character is inserted when the Tab key is pressed.

Note:  MATCHTAB will not act properly if TABKEY is enabled.

Note:  Use the Settings dialog to permanently change the default tabs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Setting Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in the margins command (on the command line dialog) and press the ENTER
key. The margins command has the following syntax:

margins  [left-margin [right-margin [new-paragraph-margin] ] ]

Examples:
  margins 1 70 5
  margins

The first example sets the left margin to the first column, the right margin to
the 70th column, and the paragraph indent to the fifth column. The second
example shows you the current margin settings and allows them to be altered.

As you continue typing, EPM will keep your text within the new margin settings.
But you will notice that your previously-entered text is not automatically
reflowed to the new margin settings. See Reflowing Marked Text for the steps to
adjust an old paragraph to the new settings.

Note:  Use the Settings dialog to permanently change the default margins.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Controlling OS/2 with EPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

It is possible to execute many OS/2 commands from the EPM Command Line.  If you
don't need to see the command's output, or respond to any prompts, you can
simply enter the command on the EPM Command Line.  For example,

erase tempfile
or

start someprogram

A few OS/2 commands (for example, CD and DIR) have EPM front-ends defined which
let you see the output inside EPM.  For any other OS/2 command for which you
need to see the output, you have two choices:

OS2 command This opens up an OS/2 windowed command prompt to execute the
          specified command.

SHELL command This creates a new file in the edit ring that is connected to an
          OS/2 command prompt.  OS/2 commands entered in this window will have
          their output appear asynchronously in the edit window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Cursor Movement and Editor Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cursor movement and editor features.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. Cursor Movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following is a summary of all of the key strokes which cause cursor
movement:

End
          Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
Home
          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
PgDn
          Moves the line at the current cursor position forward (down) one
          screen.
PgUp
          Moves the line at the current cursor position backward (up) one
          screen.
Tab
          Moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
Shift+Tab
          Moves the cursor to the previous tab stop.
Shift+F1
          Scrolls the screen left one column.
Shift+F2
          Scrolls the screen right one column.
Shift+F3
          Scrolls the screen down one row.
Shift+F4
          Scrolls the screen up one row.
Shift+F5
          Scrolls the screen so that the line at the current cursor position is
          vertically centered.
Ctrl+F5
          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current word.
Ctrl+F6
          Moves the cursor to the end of the current word.
Ctrl+Enter
          Moves cursor to the beginning of the next line.
Ctrl+Left
          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to left of cursor.
Ctrl+Right
          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to right of cursor.
Ctrl+End
          Moves the cursor to the end of the document.
Ctrl+Home
          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document.
Ctrl+PgUp
          Moves the cursor to the top of the screen.
Ctrl+PgDn
          Moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen.
Alt+Y
          Moves cursor to beginning of marked block.
Alt+E
          Moves cursor to end of marked block.
Del
          Deletes the character at the current cursor position.
Ins
          Switches between insert and replace modes.
Several EPM Commands also can be used to move the cursor to a new location.
These are as follows:

####      Moves the cursor to line ####.

+####     Move the cursor forward in the file #### lines.

.-####    Move the cursor back in the file #### lines.

BOTTOM    Move the cursor to the bottom of the file.

TOP       Move the cursor to the top of the file.

The mouse has the following functions:

Button 1 single click
          Move cursor to mouse.

Button 1 single click and drag
          Block mark as you drag.

Button 2 single click and drag
          Line mark as you drag.

Button 1 + Ctrl-key + drag
          Character mark as you drag.

Button 1 double-click
          UNMARK.

Button 2 double-click
          Move cursor to mouse and MARK the WORD.

Note:  Mouse action is configurable via macro language


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. Drawing Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM allows you to draw boxes around an area of text using graphic characters.
To do this it is first necissary to create a block mark. For information on
creating block marks see Block Marks. When the box is drawn it will encircle
the area in this block.

After creating the block mark, to insert the box issue the BOX at the EPM
Command Line followed by one of the following arguments:

1   thin, single line
2   thin, double line
3   dotted line
4   thick line
5   double, thin line horizontally; single, thin line vertically
6   double, thin line vertically; single, thin line horizontally
C   creates a box comment using the C language syntax
P   creates a box comment using the Pascal language syntax
A   creates a box comment using Assembler syntax
E   erases the box around the marked area
R   reflows text in marked area
B   places spaces on all sides of the marked area, i.e. creates a box of blank
    spaces
/character Any character which follows the slash ( / ) will be used to form a
    box.

For example, if you wished surround a marked area with a thick line you would
enter the following at the EPM Command Line:

BOX 4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. Searching and Replacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Procedures and options for searching and replacing text within a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.1. Searching for Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in a search command and press the ENTER key.

The search command has the following syntax:

     /find-this-string/ [options]
or L /find-this-string/ [options]
where the options have the following meaning:

-   Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked area
    if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each line.
+   Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.
m   Search within the Marked text area only.
a   Search All of the current file.
c   Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.
e   Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.
r   Reverse search from Right to left through lines. Default search is left to
    right through lines.
f   Forward search from left to right through lines.
g   Use the grep algorithm.  See The grep option.
x   Use the extended grep algorithm.  See Extended grep. (EPM 5.60 or above is
    required for the use of extended grep.)
w   Search for the search string as a separate word.  (EPM 6 only)
~   Search for a line which does not contain the search string. If successful,
    the cursor will be positioned at the starting point of the search for that
    line (the cursor position, if found on the first line, or the left edge of
    the mark if the M option was used and a block mark exists, or else column
    1), and the length of the match will be the remainder of the line.  (EPM 6
    only)

Multiple options may be given at one time.

Examples:

   /Word in paragraph/c
   l $/$

In the second example above, '$' is the delimiter and '/' is the string for
which to search. The default search options (if you specify nothing) are:

 1. search all the file (not only the marked area)

 2. in the forward direction

 3. not ignoring case (requiring exact matches).

The search string delimiter is the first non-blank character after the L. If
the delimiter is a '/' then the L is optional.  If the delimiter is any other
character, both the L and at least one space following it are required. The
same is true of the 'C' command.

If you wish to find the next occurrence of the same string, press the Ctrl-F
key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.2. Searching and Replacing Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in a change command and press the ENTER key.

The change command has the following syntax, very similar to that for search:

  c /find-this-string/replace-with-this/ [options]
where the options can be one or more of the following characters:

*   Change all matching strings.
-   Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked area
    if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each line.
+   Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.
m   Search within the Marked text area only.
a   Search All of the current file.
c   Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.
e   Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.
r   Reverse search from Right to left through lines. Default search is left to
    right through lines.
f   Forward search from left to right through lines.
g   Use the grep algorithm.  See The grep option.
x   Use the extended grep algorithm.  See Extended grep. (EPM 5.60 or above is
    required for the use of extended grep.)
n   (Noisy) - Provide a message indicating how many changes occurred.  (EPM 6
    only)
w   Search for the search_string as a separate word.  (EPM 6 only)
k   Match the case of each character in the replacement string, to the case of
    the corresponding character in the search string.  If the replacement
    string is longer than the search string, the case of the last alphabetic
    character in the search string will be used for all unmatched characters in
    the replacement string. (EPM 6 only)

It can be seen that these options are the same as those for search, with the
addition of *, n, and k.

Multiple options may be given at one time. If contradictory options are given
(such as ce) the last such option is the one used.

Examples:
   c /mispeled/misspelled/*
   c $/$/*$                   (change  /  to  /* )
   c/This/That/e+w            (change 'This', but not 'Thistle')
Note: Any search string delimiter may be used (not only slash) after the 'c'
and at least one blank.  The blank is optional if the delimiter is a slash.

If you wish to find the next occurrence of the same string press the Ctrl-F
key. If you wish to repeat the same change command, issue C without arguments
or use the Ctrl-C key combination.

If the * option is not used, then only the first occurrence of the search
string found will be changed. If the * option is used, then all occurrences of
the search string that are found will be changed. If you wish to change some
and not others, you can use the Search / Replace dialog, either by selecting it
from the Options pulldown, or by pressing Ctrl-S to bring it up.

Note:  The Grep option only applies to the search string, not to the
replacement string. If you enter:

c /(.*)/<.*>/ g
then EPM will find the first occurrence of a left parenthesis, followed by any
sequence of characters, and ending with a right parenthesis, and replace it
with the literal string <.*>. It will not change the parentheses to angle
brackets and leave the enclosed text unchanged.  The eXtended grep option can
be used to do this in EPM 5.60 or above (with slightly different syntax).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.3. The grep option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The grep option, 'g', allows you to specify special pattern matching characters
within the search string. These characters are:

Character:                    What it matches:

'.' (period)
                              matches any character.

'^' (caret)
                              matches the beginning of a line.

'$'
                              when it follows the search string, it matches the
                              end of a line.

'\'character
                              matches character; used to override any special
                              meaning given to characters.

'['list_of_characters']'
                              matches any of the characters in the list.

                              A list of characters can be indicated as a range
                              using the '-' (hyphen). For example, [a-z] will
                              match with any letter of the alphabet. If the
                              first character after the '[' is a '^', then the
                              set is negated, i.e., will match any character
                              except those in the set.

'*'
                              matches a sequence of 0 or more of whatever
                              expression it follows.

'+'
                              matches a sequence of 1 or more of whatever
                              expression it follows.

Examples will be presented that search the following file:

Contents of file junk.e:

soft
good junk
and more
stuff
even good
123456
l
do,re,mi,fa,so,la,ti,do
$35

--------------------------------------

Example searches using grep:

/l./g
                              finds 'la'

/^good/g
                              finds only first occurrence of 'good'

/good$/g
                              finds only 'even good'

/\$/g
                              finds '$35'

/^[m-t]/g
                              finds 'soft' and 'stuff'

/^[^adeg]/g
                              finds 'soft', 'stuff', '123456', 'l', and '$35'

/^[m-t]+/g
                              finds 'soft' and 'stuff'

/^[m-t]*/g
                              finds everything

Note:  The above examples are as you would enter them on the EPM command line.
       When using the Search dialog, you would enter the search string
       (everything between the '/') in the Search field, and select the Grep
       option in the Options section of the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.4. Extended grep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The extended grep option, 'x', allows you to specify special pattern matching
characters within the search string.  This includes all those supported for
standard grep searches, and the following search string additions:

'\b'    matches a backspace character.

'\c'    specifies the cursor position if a match is found.

'\f'    matches a form feed character.

'\n'    matches a newline character.

'\r'    matches a carriage return character.

'\t'    matches a tab character.

'\x'HH  matches a character with ASCII code 0xHH.

'\z'    matches an ASCII NUL character (0x00).

':a'    matches an alphabetic character; equivalent to [a-zA-Z]

':c'    matches a C language identifier; equivalent to [a-zA-Z_$][a-zA-Z0-9_$]*

':d'    matches a digit; equivalent to [0-9]

':f'    matches a C language function definition; optimized for usage in C tags
        support.

':h'    matches a hexadecimal number; equivalent to [0-9a-fA-F]+

':i'    matches an integer; equivalent to [0-9]+

':n'    matches an alphanumeric character; equivalent to [a-zA-Z0-9]

':o'    matches optional whitespace; equivalent to [ \t]*

':q'    matches a quoted string; equivalent to "[^"]*"|'[^']*'

':r'    matches a Rexx language identifier; equivalent to
        [a-zA-Z!?_][a-zA-Z0-9!?_]*

':w'    matches whitespace; equivalent to [ \t]+

':x'    matches a hexadecimal digit; equivalent to [0-9a-fA-F]

'|'     alternation, matches either what appears on the left or what appears on
        the right.

'(' ')' parentheses are used for grouping, and also for creating subexpressions
        for use in the replacement string.

'~'     negation, fails if the following string or expression is present

'@'     Minimally matches a sequence of 0 or more of whatever expression it
        follows. (Similar to '*', but '*' does a maximal match.)

'#'     Minimally matches a sequence of 1 or more of whatever expression it
        follows. (Similar to '+', but '+' does a maximal match.)

Note:  The classes that match more than one character are more efficient than
       the equivalent shown, because (for example) :w will match all whitespace
       as a single unit, whereas [ \t]+ could back up over each matched
       character in an attempt to match what follows in the search string.

Extended grep also adds the following replacement string additions:

'&'     represents the entire matched string

'\'n    (where n is '0' - '9') represents the corresponding subexpression of
        the matched string.  Each subexpression refers to the contents of a
        parenthesized expression, where \1 represents the string matched
        between the first open parenthesis and its corresponding close
        parenthesis, \2 the second, etc., and \0 represents the entire match
        (equivalent to '&').

'\&'    represents the '&' character.

'\\'    represents the '\' character.

'\b'    represents a backspace character.

'\f'    represents a form feed character.

'\n'    represents a newline character.

'\r'    represents a carriage return character.

'\t'    represents a tab character.

'\x'HH  represents a character with ASCII code 0xHH.

'\z'    represents an ASCII NUL character (0x00).

Some examples:

/pro(gram|cedure)/
          matches 'program' or 'procedure'.

/function:o\(:o\c/
          matches 'function', optionally followed by spaces or tabs, followed
          by an open parenthesis, and places the cursor on the first non-blank
          character after the parenthesis.

c /id=(:c)/id='\1'/ x*
          changes all strings of the form id=some_string to id='some_string'.
          (I.e., it adds single quotes around the parameter, no matter what it
          was.)

c /(myfunc:o\()([^,]*,)/\1 Global, \2 NULL,/*x
          adds a new first and third parameter to all 'myfunc' calls.  The
          first parenthesized expression matches 'myfunc', optional whitespace,
          and an open parenthesis. The second matches everything up to the next
          comma.  The replacement string uses both of these, adds ' Global, '
          after the open parenthesis, and adds the string ' NULL,' at the end.
          This would convert 'myfunc(first, second)' to 'myfunc( Global, first,
          NULL, second)'.

/DosFree~Seg)/ x
          Matches an occurrence of the string 'DosFree', which is not followed
          by 'Seg'.

Note:  EPM 5.60 or above is required for the use of extended grep.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. Adding and Multiplying Numbers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you need to add columns or rows of hex, octal or decimal numbers, EPM
provides both an add and multiply command. Just mark a block of text (Alt-B or
Alt-L) and issue the ADD or MULT command on EPM command line dialog. Each line
of text may contain a mathematical expression which is valid input for the math
command (See Calculating Mathematical Expressions). Steps to operate on a
column or row of numbers

 1. Highlight the text you wish to add or multiply. This can be accomplished by
    pressing Alt-B once at the top left corner of the column and again at the
    bottom right corner of the column of numbers. When you finish marking the
    end of the text, EPM will highlight the text in between to show you the
    column of text you have marked.

 2. Press Ctrl+I to get to EPM command line dialog.

 3. Type

        add or mult

and press ENTER.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. Calculating Mathematical Expressions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you need to add/subtract/multiply/divide hex, octal, or decimal numbers, EPM
provides a set of math commands that compute an arithmetic_expression of the
following syntax:  arithmetic_expression: arith_term {arith_operator
arith_term}  arith_term: decimal_number | hexadecimal_number | octal_number '('
arithmetic_expression ')'  arith_operator:

'+'       (addition)
'-'       (subtraction)
'*'       (multiplication)
'/'       (division)
'%'       (integer division)
'//'      (remainder)
 Hexadecimal (base 16) numbers must be preceded by a 'x', e.g. x10 = 16.  Octal
(base 8) numbers must be preceded by an 'o', e.g. o12 = 10.

For example, the following can be typed on the command line dialog:

math 123 * 4567
math 1.2 * 3.45 + 2

math  arithmetic_expression
                              The math command computes the expression and
                              displays the result as a decimal number.
mathx  arithmetic_expression
                              The mathx command computes the expression and
                              displays the result as a hexadecimal number.
matho  arithmetic_expression
                              The matho command computes the expression and
                              displays the result as an octal number.

Try some of the following math commands.

math     -10 + 40
mathx    -xff + 10
matho    o11 * (xff - 10)
The above examples would yield 30, xFF0B, and o4325 respectively.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. Drawing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using graphics characters to draw boxes and diagrams is easy in EPM. The DRAW
command can be typed at the command line dialog, or F6 can be pressed. If you
invoke the command without any parameters, the visual representations of the
parameters: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, or /any char will appear in the editor message
line. To enable drawing mode, you must issue the draw command with one of these
parameters. For example,

Draw 2
You are now in draw mode, which means that the cursor becomes like a paint
brush: everywhere you move the cursor, a double line is drawn.  If you want to
draw a box, trace the shape with the cursor using the arrow keys (Left, Right,
Up and Down).

If you want to enter text or wish to move the cursor without drawing anything,
i.e. lift the paint brush, press the Ins key. This will suspend the drawing
without exiting draw mode. To begin drawing again, simply press the Ins key
again. Pressing any key besides those on the numeric keypad, will cause draw
mode to end.

You can also draw figures with characters other than the line graphics
characters provided.  By typing the following on the command line:

Draw /(
you could draw figures composed of left parentheses.  This will work with any
character on the keyboard, as long as you precede the character by a slash (/).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. Mini-Macros - Keystroke Sequences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can record (Ctrl-R) and play back (Ctrl-T) a sequence of keystrokes. Such a
recorded sequence constitutes a temporary mini-macro which can be repeatedly
executed. Any time you find yourself entering the same key sequence more than
twice, think of recording them. The keystroke recording is retained until you
change it by making a new recording, or until you leave the editor.

To record a sequence of keys, press Ctrl-R.  You'll be prompted:

Remembering keys.
Ctrl-R to finish, Ctrl-T to finish and try, Ctrl-C to cancel.
Type your sequence of keys. Virtually any key can be recorded, including Esc to
switch to the command line dialog. (However, anything typed into the command
line isn't seen by the recorder.) The keys will be executed as you're typing.
Press Ctrl-R again to finish the recording. If you wish to cancel, press Ctrl-C
instead.

Whenever you wish to replay the sequence, press Ctrl-T. Notice that you can
also press Ctrl-T during the recording. This is only a shortcut; it has the
same effect as pressing Ctrl-R to finish the recording and Ctrl-T to replay it
immediately.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.8. Entering Control and Graphic Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enter PC graphic characters (those with extended ASCII codes greater
than 127) with Alt-keypad numbers. For example, to enter the symbol for the
Greek character pi (represented by the code 227), hold down the Alt key, type
227 on the numeric keypad, and release the Alt key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.9. Syntax-Directed Editing Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM provides syntax directed editing for PASCAL, C, Rexx and E files.  When the
Enter key or Space bar is pressed, EPM looks at the first word in the line and
keys in the rest of the structure if it understands it. Structure expansion
includes if statements, loops, case statements, and comments. Typical
syntax-directed editing features may be demonstrated by the following sequence:

edit newfile.c          (edit a new file called newfile.c)

  Type characters indicated below

    main<space bar>
    if<space bar>

Pressing the <space bar> in both instances above should have inserted the rest
of the main and if structures. If you find automatic expansion distracting you
can turn it off. See the EXPAND command and the MY_EXPAND_ON configuration
option.  If you prefer, you can omit syntax assist for any language by using
the C_SYNTAX_ASSIST, E_SYNTAX_ASSIST, P_SYNTAX_ASSIST, or REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
constants, or for all of them with ALTERNATE_KEYSETS.

Ctrl-X expands syntax even if the syntax expansion option is off, as long as
support was compiled in for that language.

EPM will automatically expand the syntax of the Pascal, C and E languages
according to the file's filename extension. For example, if the user edits a
file called test.e, the editor knows this file will contain E language
programs.

Box comments can also be created easily according to the syntax particular to
the language.  For more information, refer the BOX command entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.10. Stream Versus Line Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two basic types of editors for editing text files, a stream editor
and a line editor.  A stream editor treats the file as one long stream of text.
A line editor treats the file as a series of individual lines, separated by a
line end character.

Stream mode
          In a stream editor, a new-line character (generally an ASCII
          line-feed character) is treated like any other character.  It can be
          inserted into the text stream, breaking the line into two at that
          point, or it can be deleted from the text stream, joining the two
          lines on either side of it.  As you move the cursor left and right,
          when it passes the beginning or end of one line, it moves to the end
          or beginning of the next - because although you see individual lines
          on the display, it's actually one long stream internally.  Also, when
          you move the cursor up and down, if you move it over a shorter line,
          the cursor bounces to the left; if you continue moving it up or down
          to a longer line, it bounces back to the original column.
Line mode
          The Enhanced Editor is a line editor.  If you move the cursor left or
          right, it stays on that line.  You can move the cursor beyond the end
          of the line.  If you do so, and then start typing text, the editor
          will fill in spaces between the previous end of the line and the
          characters you have added.  Since the new-line character does not
          actually exist in the file once loaded, there is no concept of
          inserting or deleting a new-line.  Pressing the Enter key  (by
          default; another key can be chosen) adds a new line after the current
          line, but it doesn't split the line; it adds a new, empty line
          between the current line and the following line, regardless of the
          cursor position.

Since some users are accustomed to using a stream-mode editor, the Enhanced
Editor can be configured to act like one.

Related Information:

Enabling stream-mode editing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.11. Enabling Stream-Mode Editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable stream-mode editing:

 1. Select Options.
 2. Select Preferences.
 3. Select Stream editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. The Action Bar Pull-Down Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this section each action bar menu is pictured. Below each picture is a
description of the menu options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The file pull down menu list actions to be done on files. For more information
on loading files see Adding Files to an Edit Ring. The File action bar menu
contains the following entries:

New
          Replaces the current file with a new file named .Untitled. You must
          name the file by using Rename.  If the current file has been
          modified, you will be asked if you want to save it before continuing.

Open .Untitled
          Opens a new edit window with .Untitled used as the file name.

Open...
          Opens a new edit window.  A window appears, in which you can type the
          names of one or more files.  If you select Open without typing a
          name, .Untitled is used as the file name.

Import text file...
          Retrieves a file and inserts it into the current file being edited.
          The file is inserted starting after the current line.

          A window appears, in which you can type the name of the desired file.

Add file...
          Add files to the current edit window.  A window appears, in which you
          can type the name of one or more files.

Rename
          Changes the name of the file being edited.  A window appears ready
          for you type a file name.

Save
          Stores the current file on disk.

Save as...
          Assigns a name to the current file, then stores the file on disk.  It
          is equivalent to Rename followed by Save.

Save and quit
          Stores the current file and, if there were no errors storing it,
          removes the file from the edit window.  If this is the only file in
          the current edit window, the window closes.

Quit
          Removes the current file from the edit window. If there are unsaved
          changes, you are asked if you wish to save the changes, discard them,
          or cancel the Quit.  When you quit the last file in the edit window,
          the window closes.

Print file...
          Prints the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit action bar menu contains the following entries:

Undo line
          Reverses any changes that you just typed on the current line.  If you
          select this in error, you can immediately select it again to redo the
          changes. Once you move the cursor off the line, the changes are
          committed and you cannot use Undo line to remove them, instead; you
          must use Undo.

Undo...
          Displays a window which allows you step through the changes you have
          made to the file.

Copy
          Copies the marked text to the clipboard.

Cut
          Copies the marked text to the clipboard, and then deletes it from
          EPM.

Paste
          Inserts text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
          cursor position.  The text from the clipboard is treated as a
          character mark - that is it is treated as a stream of text, possibly
          containing embedded line breaks, rather than as a series of lines.

Paste lines
          Copies text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
          cursor position.  Each line of text in the clipboard is added as a
          new line in EPM.

Paste block
          Inserts text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
          cursor position.  The clipboard text is treated as a block mark,
          surrounded by the smallest possible bounding rectangle.

Style...
          Changes the font or color of the marked text.

Copy mark
          Copies the marked text to the current cursor position.

Move mark
          Moves the marked text to the current cursor position.

Overlay mark
          Overwrites the text at the current cursor position with a copy of the
          marked text.

Adjust mark
          Overwrites the text at the current cursor position with the marked
          text and leaves blanks in place of the source text.

Unmark
          Removes any mark that exists in this window. The marked text is not
          changed.

Delete mark
          Erases the marked text.  If the mark is a block mark, the text that
          is marked is erased, but the space remains in the file.

Push mark
          Saves the location of a mark.  You can then select Unmark, mark other
          text, manipulate it, and then select Pop mark to restore the original
          mark.

          Note:  Only the boundary of the mark is saved, not the contents.

Pop mark
          Restores the location of a previous mark.

Swap mark
          Exchanges the current mark with the topmost mark on the stack (the
          most recently pushed mark).

Push cursor
          Saves the current cursor position.  You can later select Pop cursor
          to jump back to the same place in the same file.

Pop cursor
          Restores the previous cursor position.

Swap cursor
          Exchanges the current cursor position with the topmost position on
          the stack (the most recently pushed position).

          Note:  The above 6 entries will only be present if Stack Commands is
                 enabled on the Preferences menu, or if they are configured in
                 with the WANT_STACK_CMDS option.

Print mark...
          Prints a copy of the marked text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Searching and Replacing for more information about searching and replacing
text. The Search action bar menu contains the following entries:

Search
          Displays the Search window, which enables you to search through the
          file or change one string to another.

Find next
          Repeats the previous Find command.

Change next
          Repeats the previous Change command.

Bookmarks
          A cascade menu which has the following choices:

   Set...    Displays a window that enables you to create a bookmark at the
             current cursor position.
   List...   Displays a list of bookmarks for the current file.  You can place
             the cursor at a particular bookmark by selecting it from the list.
   Next      Places the cursor at the next bookmark.
   Previous  Places the cursor at the previous bookmark.

Tags
          A cascade menu which has the following choices:

   Find current procedure Looks up the procedure at the cursor position in the
             tags file; if found, positions you in the source file where that
             procedure is defined.
   Find procedure... As above, but presents an entry field where you can type
             in the name of a procedure to be located.
   Tags file name... Displays (and lets you change) the name of the tags file
             in use.
   Make tags file... Presents a dialog in which you can enter a list of source
             files, in order to create or update the current tags file.

          Note:  The Tags menu is present only in EPM 5.60 or above, and only
                 if the WANT_TAGS configuration option is set. See the EPM 5.60
                 / 6.00 online help for a description of what tags files are.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Options action bar menu contains the following entries:

List ring...
          Lists the files in the edit ring. From the list, you can select any
          file and make it the current file.

Proof
          Spell-checks the file or marked area.

Proof word
          Spell-checks the word at the cursor position.

Synonym
          Displays a list of synonyms for the word at the cursor position.

          Note:  LEXAM.DLL is required to be in the LIBPATH for the above 3
                 options to work.  If CHECK_FOR_LEXAM is set in the
                 configuration file, these menu selections will not be
                 displayed if LEXAM.DLL is missing.

Preferences
          Switchs edit-window options or displays the Settings window.

   Settings  Displays a window, from which you can change editor configuration
             settings (such as color and fonts).
   Advanced marking Switchs between the basic marking mode and the advanced EPM
             marking mode.  The mode of marking that you use affects the way
             your mouse works.
   Stream editing Switchs between stream-mode and line-mode editing.
   Ring enabled Allows multiple files to exist in the edit ring.  The edit ring
             always exists, but unless you select this option, the editor
             prevents you from loading more than one file at a time into it.

             A check mark appears next to this choice if it is currently
             active.
   Stack commands Controls whether the stack-related commands are present on
             the Edit menu.
   CUA accelerators Toggles whether the Alt+letter keys corresponding to action
             bar mnemonics perform the EPM-defined actions or whether they
             activate the corresponding menu item.

          Note:  If the configuration options are set such that nothing would
                 be on the Preferences menu but Settings, then Settings is
                 instead displayed on the main Options menu in place of
                 Preferences.

Autosave...
          Displays the autosave file name and the number of changed lines per
          autosave.  You can also list the autosave directory.

Messages...
          Allows you to review displayed editor messages.

Frame controls
          Configures various edit window frame controls.

   Status line Switchs the status line on and off.
   Message line Switchs the message line on and off.
   Scrollbars Toggles the scroll bars on and off.
   Rotate buttons Switchs the rotate buttons on and off.
   Info at top Switchs the position of the Information window between the top
             and the bottom of the edit window.  The information window is
             composed of the status line and the message line.
   Prompting Toggles whether prompts are displayed when menu choices are
             selected.  Displaying the prompts forces the Information window to
             be displayed at the bottom of the edit window instead of at the
             top.

             Note:  The menu prompting is done through an internal command that
                    is called whenever a menu choice is selected.  Therefore,
                    the prompting will not appear while another command is
                    processing.  This ensures that you will always be able to
                    select Halt command to stop processing.

Save options
          Stores the current settings of the frame controls, Preferences
          options, the size and position of the edit window, and a few command
          settings (PROFILE, LONGNAMES, TABKEY and ESCAPEKEY). The next time an
          edit window is opened, these same settings are used.

Book icon
          Activates EPM book icon, from which you can close EPM or list all
          edit windows.

          Note:  This selection is only present if SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON is set in
                 the configuration file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The command menu allows access to the command line dialog. Commands that can be
entered are listed in the EPMCommands Described section. The Command action bar
menu contains the following entries:

Command dialog
          Brings up the EPM Command Line dialog box.

Halt command
          Stops the execution of the current command.

Create shell
          Creates a command shell, an OS/2 command prompt where you can type
          commands.  The output appears in an edit window while other programs
          are running.

Write to shell
          Writes a string to the command shell. The string is generally a
          command, but can also be the response to a prompt in the shell
          window.

Note:  The Create shell and the Write to shell menu choices only apear if a
       SHELL command has been given.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM includes two types of help. You can browse the EPMHELP.HLP file, which
lists the basic commands and key definitions, or you can use the Help Manager
to view help panels containing hypertext links. Pressing F1 will place you in
the Help Manager viewing the EPM help Table of Contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. The Function Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The function keys are designed to perform a series of actions or tasks when you
press them. The function keys are bound to the most common editorial tasks, so
that you may perform these tasks with one simple push of a button. The
following sections contain a discussion of the action performed when one of the
function keys is pressed in any of the shift states.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. F1-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section explains the actions of the 12 base function keys F1 to F12 as
implemented in the standard EPM package.

F1=Help
                    The F1 key brings up the Help Manager, displaying the
                    Contents page for EPM help.

F2=Save
                    To save the current file without exiting, press the F2 key.

F3=Quit
                    The F3 key will remove your file's text from the file ring
                    without saving it. If your file has been modified, you will
                    be asked whether you really wish to throw away the changes.
                    When you quit from the last (visible) file of the last
                    ring, you will exit to OS/2.

F4=Save & Quit
                    To save your file and remove it from the file ring press
                    F4. When you quit from the last (visible) file of the last
                    ring, you will exit to OS/2.

F5=Open
                    To start editing a file on a new ring press F5, type the
                    filename, and press Enter. The ESC key will cancel the
                    request. You can enter more than one filename separated by
                    a space, and can specify wild cards in filenames like *.doc
                    or *.c.

F6=Draw
                    To start drawing text graphics press F6. Then type a number
                    (1 through 6), B for blank, or / followed by any character.
                    You will be able to create or erase text graphic drawings
                    by moving around with the cursor keys. See section Drawing
                    Lines for more information.

F7=Name
                    To change the name of the file you are editing press F7,
                    type the new name and press enter. This does not change the
                    name of the previous copy on disk; it changes the name the
                    file will next be saved under. Renaming is a good way to
                    start a revised copy without losing the original file.

F8=Edit
                    To edit another file on the same ring press F8, type the
                    filename, and press Enter. The ESC key will cancel the
                    request. You can enter more than one filename separated by
                    a space and wild cards are allowed in filenames. Press the
                    F11 and F12 (or Ctrl-N and Ctrl-P) keys to switch between
                    the files you are editing.

F9=Undo
                    If you mistype a change to a line, you can restore its
                    original contents by pressing F9. Undo does not restore
                    deleted lines or changes to multiple lines. Only the
                    current line you are editing can be restored.

F10=Action Bar
                    Press F10 to toggle between the action bar and the text.
                    Pressing and releasing Alt without combining it with any
                    other keystrokes will also toggle between the action bar
                    and the text.

                    Note:  F10 no longer moves to the next file in the ring.
                           Use F11/F12 or Ctrl-N/Ctrl-P to change between files.

F11=Previous
                    If you have loaded multiple files (F8 key or Edit command)
                    in a ring press F11 to switch to the previous file in the
                    ring.

F12=Next
                    If you have loaded multiple files (F8 key or Edit command)
                    in a ring press F12 to switch to the next file in the ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Alt-F1 - Alt-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section explains the actions performed when the Alt key and one of the 12
function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Alt-Fn keys have a specific
action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys that do
perform some function.

Alt-F1=LineChars
                    The Alt-F1 key prints all the characters with which you can
                    draw a line or box. This line of characters is printed at
                    the cursor location.

Alt-F7=ShiftWindow
                    To move EPM editor window use the Alt-F7 key combination to
                    pickup the window, the arrow keys to move the window, and
                    the enter key to drop the window.

Alt-F8=SizeWindow
                    To resize EPM editor window use the Alt-F8 key combination
                    to enter the size mode, the arrow keys to enlarge/shrink
                    the window, and the enter key to enact the changes. The
                    first arrow key movement determines which side will be
                    altered. For instance, to shrink the left boundary, the
                    user would type Alt-F8, the left arrow key, as many right
                    arrow keys as needed, and then the enter key to enact the
                    size change.

Alt-F9=Minimize
                    To minimize (iconize) the current EPM session use the
                    Alt-F9 combination.

Alt-F10=Maximize
                    To maximize (enlarge EPM screen) use the Alt-F10
                    combination.

Note:  The Alt-F10 key combination is no longer used to switch between files in
a ring. Instead use F11 or Ctrl-P to move to the previous file in a ring and
F12 or Ctrl-N to move to the next file in a ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Shift-F1 - Shift-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section explains the actions performed when the Shift key and one of the
12 function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Shift-Fn keys have a
specific action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys
that do perform some function. All the Shift-Fn keys control screen scrolling.
This is different from the cursor movement keys, because scrolling causes the
contents of the screen to be moved while the cursor remains stationery.

Shift-F1=ScrlLeft
                    The Shift-F1 key scrolls the screen to the left.

Shift-F2=ScrlRight
                    The Shift-F2 key scrolls the screen to the right.

Shift-F3=ScrlDown
                    The Shift-F3 key scrolls the screen down.

Shift-F4=ScrlUp
                    The Shift-F4 key scrolls the screen up.

Shift-F5=CenterLine
                    The Shift-F5 key scrolls the screen so that the line that
                    the cursor is on is centered vertically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. Ctrl-F1 - Ctrl-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section explains the actions performed when the Ctrl key and one of the 12
function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Ctrl-Fn keys have a specific
action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys that do
perform some function.

Ctrl-F1=UpperWord
                    The Ctrl-F1 key converts a word to entirely uppercase
                    letters. The word is specified by placing the cursor
                    anywhere on the word before pressing the Ctrl-F1 key.

Ctrl-F2=LowerWord
                    The Ctrl-F2 key converts a word to entirely lowercase
                    letters. The word is specified by placing the cursor
                    anywhere on the word before pressing the Ctrl-F2 key.

Ctrl-F3=UpperMark
                    The Ctrl-F3 key converts all text in a marked area to
                    entirely uppercase letters.

Ctrl-F4=LowerMark
                    The Ctrl-F4 key converts all text in a marked area to
                    entirely lowercase letters.

Ctrl-F5=BeginWord
                    The Ctrl-F5 key moves the cursor to the first character of
                    the word upon which the cursor is presently placed.

Ctrl-F6=EndWord
                    The Ctrl-F6 key moves the cursor to the last character of
                    the word upon which the cursor is presently placed.

Ctrl-F7=Shift mark left
                    The Ctrl-F7 key moves a marked area left.

Ctrl-F8=Shift mark right
                    The Ctrl-F8 key moves a marked area right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Key Definitions Summary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

--- Function keys ---------------------------------------------
    Unshifted        Alternate        Shifted           Ctrl
    ---------        ---------        -------           ----
F1  Help menu        Show draw chars  Scroll left       Uppercase word
F2  Save and continue                 Scroll right      Lowercase word
F3  Quit w/o save                     Scroll down       Uppercase mark
F4  Save and quit    Close EPM Window Scroll up         Lowercase mark
F5  Edit in new ring Restore Window   Center line vrt.  Crsr to bgn wrd
F6  Draw                                                Crsr to end wrd
F7  Change filename  Move EPM window                    Move area left
F8  Edit new file    Size EPM window                    Move area right
F9  Undo cur. line   Minimize
F10 Goto action bar  Maximize
F11 Previous file
F12 Next file
--- Alt keys --------------------------------------------------
Alt-A : Adjust marked area, blank old Alt-O : Overlay blocked area
Alt-B : mark Block                    Alt-P : reformat following Paragraph
Alt-C : Copy mark                     Alt-Q :
Alt-D : Delete marked area            Alt-R : Reflow marked area
Alt-E : cursor to End of marked area  Alt-S : Split line at cursor
Alt-F : Fill marked area              Alt-T : cenTer Text in marked block
Alt-G :                               Alt-U : Unmark
Alt-H :                               Alt-V :
Alt-I :                               Alt-W : mark Word
Alt-J : Join (with following line)
Alt-K :                               Alt-Y : cursor to beginning of mark
Alt-L : mark Line                     Alt-Z : mark, character mode
Alt-M : Move marked area              Alt-1 : Edit filename on current line
Alt-N : keyin file Name at cursor     Alt-= : Execute the current line
-- Ctrl keys -------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-A :                              Ctrl-N : Next file in ring
Ctrl-B : list Bookmarks               Ctrl-O : Open file
Ctrl-C : Change next occurrence       Ctrl-P : Previous file in ring
Ctrl-D : Delete word                  Ctrl-Q : Toggle for ALL /search_string/
Ctrl-E : Erase to end of line         Ctrl-R : Record remembered key sequence
Ctrl-F : repeat previous Find command Ctrl-S : pop Search dialog
Ctrl-G : list edit rinG               Ctrl-T : play remembered key sequence
Ctrl-H : keyword Help                 Ctrl-U :
Ctrl-I : Goto EPM Command Line        Ctrl-V :
Ctrl-J :                              Ctrl-W :
Ctrl-K : duplicate line               Ctrl-X : force syntaX expansion
Ctrl-L : copy Line to cmd line dialog Ctrl-Y : change stYle
Ctrl-M : insert line; keep cursor pos.Ctrl-Z :
Ctrl-2 : inserts ASCII null           Ctrl-Bkspc : delete line


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. EPM Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Commands which may be executed from the EPM Command Line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. The EPM Command Line Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM editor has a command line dialog used to issue internal commands and
external macros. The command line dialog is invoked by pressing Ctrl+I or from
the Command pulldown menu of the action bar. You may retrieve previous commands
you have typed by pressing the up and down arrow keys (or using the mouse)
while the cursor is in the dialog box.

As you type a command, the editor will attempt to match what you're typing with
an existing line in the selection list.  At any point you can press Ctrl+O to
select the matched line in the list, or Ctrl+F to find the next matching line.
Ctrl+Backspace will delete the line from the list.

The standard commands are shown in the next section. If you enter something
other than one of these commands, EPM will pass the command line to the
operating system for interpretation. When a command is issued, the editor
searches for the executable code for the command in the following order:

 1. user-defined command (a command defined by the user in a .E file using a
    DEFC construct and compiled into an .EX. file)

 2. built-in command internal to the editor (i.e. those listed in the following
    section)

 3. an external program, which is searched for according to the same rules as
    OS/2:

    a. looks for a .EXE or a .CMD file in current directory

    b. looks for a .EXE or a .CMD file in the directories listed in the PATH
       environment variable.

In the next section upper case letters are to be taken literally, (i.e. should
be entered as shown, but may be entered in either upper or lower case). Lower
case words are descriptive, telling what kind of information is to be filled
in. For example, the word filespec means any valid OS/2 file specification,
d:\path\filename.ext. If the drive and path are omitted, the current values are
assumed.

The following symbols are used to describe the syntax of EPM commands more
precisely:

{  }
                    Zero or more repetitions of what is enclosed in the brackets.

[  ]
                    Zero or one of what is enclosed in the brackets.

A | B
                    Choice of either A OR B.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. EPM Commands Described ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Detailed descriptions of all valid EPM Commands, as of the writing of this
document.  Selecting Help / Commands help in EPM will list these as well as any
newer commands that might have been added.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.1. #### (Go to line ####) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

   ####

Goes to line number ####.

Example:

   321

Places the cursor on line 321.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.2. + [####] (Go ahead #### lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    +####

Moves forward (down) #### lines. If no number is specified, the cursor goes to
the bottom of file.

Example:

    +42

Moves the cursor ahead 42 lines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.3. - [####] (Go back #### lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    -####

Moves backward (up) #### lines. If no number is specified, the cursor goes to
the top of file.

Example:

    -13

Moves the cursor back 13 lines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.4. /pattern/ - + M A C E R F G  (Search for Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Same as the L command. This / form saves a couple of keystrokes if the search
string does not itself contain a slash. Additional options (X | W | ~) are
available as of version 6.02. Refer to the L command for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.5. ACTIVATE_ACCEL  (Activate an Accelerator Table) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ACTIVATE_ACCEL [table_name]

Use ACTIVATE_ACCEL in a Rexx macro to activate the named accelerator table.  If
no name is given, the current accelerator table (which could have been updated
with the BUILDACCEL command) is rebuilt.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.6. ADD  (Add Marked Numbers) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ADD

Adds the marked block containing numeric expressions. See Adding and Multipling
Numbers.

Example:

1
2
3  4

If this text was marked and the ADD command was issued, the end result would
be:

1
2
3  4
  10


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.7. ALL  (Search Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ALL /search_string[/c]

Will create a new file showing all occurrences of the search string given. The
search string should be sandwiched between two delimiters (shown here as
slashes). The C option cause ALL to ignore the case in the search. For example:

  ALL /find me/
  ALL $and/or$c
The first example will find all occurrences of the text find me The second
example will find all occurrences of the text and/or. The c option is invoked
on the second example, meaning that the text and/or can appear in any
combinations of upper and lowercase, whereas find me must be in lower case.

All lines with the search string located somewhere in the line will be listed
in a separate file in the ring called .ALL.

The key Ctrl+Q is set up so that if you press it while in the .ALL file, it
will position you on the corresponding line in the original file. If you are
not in .ALL, you will be placed there and the cursor will be moved down one
line. This enables you to rapidly switch from .ALL to succeeding lines of the
original.

To use this command EPM.E must have been compiled with the variable WANT_ALL
set to TRUE in your MYCNF.E file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.8. APPEND,APP  (Append Text to File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    APPEND filename

Appends marked text to the file filename. If no text is marked, the entire
current file is taken as the source. See PUT for more details.

Example:

    APPEND D:\HOTEL\FAULTY.DAT

Appends the marked text to the file FAULTY.DAT which is located in the HOTEL
directory of drive D.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.9. ASC  (Determine ASCII values) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ASC char

Will determine the ASCII value of the char specified. This command is the
opposite of the CHR command.

Example:

    ASC *

Returns the ASCII value of *.  In this case this would appear in the message
line:

 asc *=42


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.10. AUTOSAVE  (Set/View Autosave Values) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    AUTOSAVE [ #### | ON | OFF | ? ]

Saves the current file to a temporary file after #### number of modifications.
If a number or on is specified, the name of the temporary file is shown. If ?
is the parameter, the current autosave value (####) is displayed. Off stops the
feature until the next Autosave ON or #### command.

Note:  These temporary files are saved in case of system or power failure. They
are deleted as soon as you exit from the editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.11. BM, SETMARK  (Set Bookmarks) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BM | SETMARK [bookmark_name [ class [line [col] ] ] ]
 Sets a bookmark.  If no arguments are given, the bookmark will be set the the
current cursor position and a dialog box will appear prompting you for the name
of the bookmark.

The first argument, if given, will be used as the name of the bookmark to be
created.  The second argument is a flag which determines whether the bookmark
is permanent (4) or temporary and can also be userd to group bookmarks. The
DeleteBMClass command can be used to delete all bookmarks with the same class.
The third argument is the line number where you wish the bookmark to be
located. The final argument is the column number.

Examples:

    BM introduction 1

Sets a permanent bookmark named introduction at the current cursor position.

    SETMARK marker 0 5 1

Sets a temporary bookmark named marker at line 5 and column 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.12. BOTTOM, BOT  (Move to Bottom of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BOTTOM | BOT | +

Moves to bottom of file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.13. BOX  (Draw Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BOX 1|2|3|4|5|6|C|P|A|E|R|B|S|/character

Draws a box around a marked text block. The options will be listed on screen if
the BOX command is issued with no parameter. The options are :

1     thin, single line
2     thin, double line
3     dotted line
4     thick line
5     double, thin line horizontally; single, thin line vertically
6     double, thin line vertically; single, thin line horizontally
C     creates a box comment using the C language syntax
P     creates a box comment using the Pascal language syntax
A     creates a box comment using Assembler syntax
E     erases the box around the marked area
R     reflows text in marked area
B     places spaces on all sides of the marked area, i.e. creates a box of
      blank spaces
S     creates a box comment using Script (Document Composition Facility)
      Comments
/character Any character which follows the slash ( / ) will be used to form a
      box.

Note:  If you wish to create an E-style comment box, use the C option.

Example:

    BOX C

Will draw a C style comment box which will look something like this:

     /**************/
     /*            */
     /**************/

Note:  Styles 5 and 6 use characters that are used as national support
       characters, and may not look right in character sets other than the US
       Code Page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.14. BROWSE  (Allow Updates to File Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BROWSE ON | OFF | ?

The browse command allows the user to determine whether the file can be updated
or not. The options are:

ON
    the file can only be read, and not updated
OFF
    the file can be both read and updated
?
    the browse status (ON or OFF) can be determined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.15. BUILDACCEL  (Build Accelerator Table Entry) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BUILDACCEL table flags key index command

Use BUILDACCEL to add an accelerator table entry to an accelerator. table is
the name of the table to be updated; use '*' to indicate the currently active
accelerator table.  flags is a combination of flags corresponding to the AF_
constants in PMWIN.H in the OS/2 Toolkit, keys is an ASCII key value if flags =
AF_CHAR; a VK_ constant from PMWIN.H if flags = AF_VIRTUALKEY, etc.  (See the
EPM Technical Reference for further details.)  index is a unique number (unique
in the active menu as well as the active accelerator table), and command is the
command to be executed when the key is pressed.

/* Rexx example of accelerator key definition */
   AF_CHAR        =   1   /* key style constants */
   AF_VIRTUALKEY  =   2
   AF_SCANCODE    =   4
   AF_SHIFT       =   8
   AF_CONTROL     =  16
   AF_ALT         =  32
   AF_LONEKEY     =  64

   VK_F1        = 32
   VK_ALT       = 11

'buildaccel *' (AF_CHAR + AF_CONTROL)      122 9300 'sayerror Ctrl+z pressed'
                                  /* ASCII 122 = 'z' */
'buildaccel *' (AF_CHAR + AF_CONTROL)       90 9301 'sayerror Ctrl+Z pressed'
                                  /* ASCII  90 = 'Z' */
'buildaccel *' (AF_VIRTUALKEY + AF_ALT)  VK_F1 9302 'qtime'
                                /* Alt+F1 tells the time */
'buildaccel *  (AF_VIRTUALKEY + AF_LONEKEY)  VK_ALT 9303 'sayerror F10 = action bar'
                                /* Block Alt key from going to the action bar. */
'activateaccel'  /* No argument => use current table name. */


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.16. BUILDMENUITEM  (Add Menu Item to Pulldown) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BUILDMENUITEM menuname submenuid menuitemid submenutext attrib helppanel e_command

Use BUILDMENUITEM in a Rexx macro to add menu items to an action bar pulldown.
Buildmenuitem adds a menu item to the pulldown with ID submenuid in the menu
named menuname. The text displayed on the pulldown will be submenutext (which
can not contain spaces). The attribute will be attrib (see the menu calls in
the OS/2 Technical Reference for the various attributes, or just use 0), the
help panel resid that will be displayed if the user presses F1 while the menu
item is selected is helppanel (0 if no help for that menu item), and e_command
is the command that will be executed if that menu item is selected. All the
menuitemid's must be unique.

/* Rexx sample .erx file - adds "RexxInterface" to the action bar, */
/* with two menu entries under it.                               */
'buildsubmenu default 1990 RexxInterface  0 0'
'buildmenuitem default 1990 1991 AddCommentFields      0 0 rx comment'
'buildmenuitem default 1990 1992 ShowRexxDateFormats   0 0 rx rxdates'
'showmenu default'

The submenuids for the standard menus (defined in STDMENU.E) are:

File        2
Edit        8
Search      3
Options     4
Command     1
Help        6


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.17. BUILDSUBMENU  (Build an Action Bar Pulldown) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    BUILDSUBMENU menuname submenuid submenutext attrib helppanel e_command

Use BUILDSUBMENU in a Rexx macro to create a new action bar entry. Buildsubmenu
adds a pulldown to the action bar menu named menuname, as submenu number
submenuid.  The text displayed on the action bar will be submenutext (which can
not contain spaces), the attribute will be attrib (see the menu calls in the
OS/2 Technical Reference for the various attributes, or just use 0), the help
panel resid that will be displayed if the user presses F1 while the menu item
is selected is helppanel (0 if no help for that menu item), and e_command is
the command that will be executed if that menu item is selected.  It should be
blank (omitted) if you want to define a pull-down; if a command is defined in
the Buildsubmenu opcode then it will act immediately.  If no command is
defined, then the pull-down menu presented will be all the menu items added via
Buildmenuitem calls that specified the same submenuid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.18. CD  (Change Current Directory) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CD [path]

If path is specified, changes current directory to path. If no path is
specified, the current directory is shown as a message.

Note:  The CD command is not quite equivalent to the OS/2 CD command. In EPM
the drive can be changed by issuing a CD command. For instance, even if you
were in the directory:  D:\EDIT\EPM, the following would work:

  cd e:\masm\files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.19. CHANGE,C  (Search and Replace Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CHANGE | C /find_string/replace_with/ [-|+|*|M|A|C|E|R|F|G|X]

Changes the find_string to the replace_with string. The '/' may be changed to
any character; the first character after the 'C' and at least one space is used
as the string delimiter. (The space is optional if the delimiter is a '/'.) The
third delimiter is needed only if options are specified.

OPTION EFFECT

-    Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked
     area if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each
     line.

+    Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.

*    Change all occurrences

M    Search within the Marked text area only.

A    Search All of the current file.

C    Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.

E    Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.

R    Search from Right to left through lines.  Default search is left to right
     through lines.

F    Search from left to right through lines.

G    Use the grep algorithm.  See The grep option.
(See Steps to Search for a String and Replace It with Another for details.)

Example:

    C /dead parrot/slug/*

Will replace all of the occurrences of the string dead parrot with slug.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.20. CENTER  (Center Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CENTER

If one or more lines are marked, centers the text on each marked line within
the current margins. If a block is marked, the text in the block is centered
within the limits of the block. If nothing is marked, centers the current line
within the margins.

Example:

This isn't a lymrick
'cause ya can't sing it.

If the above text was marked and the CENTER command was issued the result would
look like this:

       This isn't a lymrick
     'cause ya can't sing it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.21. CHR  (Returns ASCII Character) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CHR ASCII_character_code

Displays the character associated with the ASCII_character_code specified. The
CHR command is the opposite of the ASC command.

Example:

    CHR 42

Will place the following message in the message line:

chr 42=*


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.22. CLOSE  (Close All Files in Ring) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CLOSE

CLOSE will close all the files in the current ring. The user will be prompted
before closing any modified files in the ring. However, if the user chooses not
to close any of the modified files, no files will be closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.23. CONFIGDLG  (Open Settings Dialog Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CONFIGDLG

Brings up the Settings dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.24. COPY2CLIP  (Copy Marked Text to PM Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    COPY2CLIP

Copies marked text to the PM clipboard for transfer between EPM files or with
other PM applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.25. CURSOR_STYLE  (Set Cursor Shape) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CURSOR_STYLE [1 | 2 | cursor_dimensions]

Sets the cursor shape.  1 gives a GPI-style cursor (vertical bar in insert
mode), 2 gives a VIO-style cursor (underline in replace mode), and
cursor_dimensions lets you specify the exact shape cursor you want, as follows:

replace_width.replace_height insert_width.insert_height
Each width and height value can be a positive number, representing the number
of pixels wide or high the cursor should be, or a negative number, whose
absolute value represents the number of 128ths of the character width or height
the cursor should be.  So, 2.-128 would represent a cursor 2 pixels wide and
the same height as the current character.

This command is only defined when DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE = 1 is included in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.26. CUT  (Cut Mark and Place in Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    CUT

Calls COPY2CLIP to copy marked text to the PM clipboard, then deletes the
marked text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.27. DELETEAUTOSAVEFILE  (Delete Autosave File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DELETEAUTOSAVEFILE

Deletes any existing file which has been created by the AUTOSAVE command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.28. DELETEBM  (Delete Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DELETEBM bookmark_name

Deletes the bookmark of the name bookmark_name.

Example:

    DELETEBM the buck stops here

Deletes bookmark with name the buck stops here.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.29. DELETEMENU  (Delete a Menu Item) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DELETEMENU menuname submenuid menuitemid itemonly

Use DELETEMENU to delete an action bar or pulldown menu item. menuname is the
name of the menu.  submenuid is the pulldown submenu that is to be deleted.
(To delete all submenus set this parameter to 0.) menuitemid is the item to
start deleting off a particular submenu (To delete all menu items under a
submenu, set this parameter to 0.) itemonly is true if it is desired to delete
only the items under a sub-menu but not the sub-menu itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.30. DIR  (List Directory) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DIR [path]

Opens a new file in the edit ring with a directory of the specified path, or if
no path was specified, of the current path. You can use the equal sign = here
as a shorthand for either the current file's directory or filename, as in the
Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details. E.g., Dir =*.c

Although the text in this window can be maniplulated in the same way as a
regular file, it must be renamed before it can be saved. Common actions
include:  SORTing the directory and using the Alt-1 key combination to load the
file listed on the cursor line for editing.

Example:

    DIR C:\ANIMALS\RABBIT

Lists the directory C:\ANIMALS\RABBIT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.31. DISPLAY  (Change Message Display Actions) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DISPLAY number

Use DISPLAY in a Rexx macro to control message display and screen updating.  A
negative number turns the display control off, and a positive number turns it
back on.  You can turn on or off multiple flags in one DISPLAY call by adding
them together, provided they are all positive or negative. -1 turns off screen
update; 1 turns it back on. -2 turns off the display of messages; 2 turns it
back on. -4 forces messages to be displayed in the message box; 4 reverts to
displaying them on the message line; -8 prevents messages from being saved in
the message box list; 8 lets them be saved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.32. DOLINES  (Execute Marked Lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DOLINES

Executes the marked lines.  (Line mark required.) Works only if the text
contained in the marked lines are EPM or OS/2 commands.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.33. DPATH  (Query DPATH Setting) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DPATH

Opens a temporary file and displays the DPATH setting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.34. DRAW  (Draw Lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    DRAW [1|2|3|4|5|6|B|/character]

Allows text drawing with cursor keys. If no option is specified, all options
and their visual representation are shown as a message. The options are:

1  single line
2  double line
3  dotted-line (VM-style) drawings
4  heavy solid line
5  single/double line mixed vert/horiz
6  double/single line mixed vert/horiz
B  Blanks, for erasing other lines
/  Slash, followed by any character with which
   you want to draw lines

Note:  Styles 5 and 6 use characters that are used as national support
       characters, and may not look right in character sets other than the US
       Code Page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.35. ECHO  (Command Execution Trace Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ECHO [ON|OFF]

Turns command execution trace on or off. Useful for seeing what a macro is
doing during development. You can turn echo on without recompiling the macro to
see what commands are executed.

Note:  Attempting to access a menu pulldown while echo is on will not work, so
       you will have to access the command line via Escape [if enabled] or
       Ctrl+I in order to turn Echo Off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.36. EDIT, ED, E  (Load File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    EDIT | ED | E [ [ [options] filespec ] [quoted-command] ]

Loads specified files into the active ring. If file already exists in the
active ring, then it is activated.

The following options are valid when typing the EDIT command on the command
line dialog and when invoking the editor from the OS/2 prompt:

OPTION    EFFECT
/b        (EPM 5.60 & above) Search both ring and disk - the copy of the file
          currently in the ring will be activated if it is present, otherwise,
          the file will be searched for on disk. This is the default.
/bin      (EPM 5.60 & above) Load the file in binary format.  All line
          terminators will appear in the file, and can be edited like any other
          character.  Lines may or may not be broken at the line terminator,
          depending on the presence and position of the /nnn option.  See the
          description of that option for details.
/d        forces file to be loaded from disk, even if the file already exists
          in the edit ring.
/k        locks the file when opening it, preventing other applications from
          modifying the file.  Compare this with the LOCK command, which
          prevents other applications from reading as well as from writing the
          file.
/l        use the DOS convention that a new line is signified by a carriage
          return followed by a line feed. Carriage returns or line feeds
          standing by themself are kept as text.
/n        restricts file searching to the files already loaded. A match is
          considered if filename matches the last length(filename) characters
          of a file already in a ring. In practice this means you can specify
          only the filename and extension, without the drive and path, and EPM
          will find it.
/t        prevents expansion of tabs when the file is loaded. By default, tabs
          are expanded according to the template defined in the .tabs setting.
          (See Setting Tabs).
/u        use the Unix convention that a line feed alone is sufficient to start
          a new line when loading a file. Carriage returns are discarded.
/nnn      (EPM 5.60 & above) Load the file with a maximum line length of nnn
          characters. Any lines longer than that will be split into multiple
          lines.  The fact that the lines were split will be remembered, and
          the pieces will be glued back together when the file is saved.  The
          default is that lines will only be broken if they are longer than the
          maximum line size that can be handled. This limit is currently 1600
          characters.

          If the /BIN option is specified, then the relative position of the
          two options controls the result.  If the /BIN option appears first,
          then nnn will be treated as an upper limit; lines will be broken at a
          line terminator or at nnn characters, whichever comes first.  If the
          /nnn option appears first, then it will be given priority, and the
          line terminators will be ignored, so that every line will be exactly
          nnn characters long (except for the last line, which might be
          shorter).
=         is shorthand for same path as last specified at the OS/2 prompt, or
          same as current file's at the editor command line dialog.

The last option can save many keystrokes if you're editing several files in
another directory. From the file specification window:

      \pas\lang\foo.pas =foo.bak
will load the two files foo.pas and foo.bak, both from the directory \pas\lang.
If filespec is to include multiple filenames, the filenames must be separated
by spaces.

From the editor command line dialog, the equals sign substitutes the current
file's path, filename, and/or extension, depending on where it appears. For
example:

Your current directory is C:\EDIT
The current file is C:\MYDOC\PROG\FOO.DOC

Edit =bar.zot
                                                  C:\MYDOC\PROG\BAR.ZOT

Edit C:\EDIT\=
                                                  C:\EDIT\FOO.DOC

Edit =bar.=
                                                  C:\MYDOC\PROG\BAR.DOC

Edit =.new
                                                  C:\MYDOC\PROG\FOO.NEW

In addition to files to be edited, the Edit command accepts commands to be
executed. To distinguish commands from filenames, the commands must be placed
between matched single quotes.  If the command to be executed contains single
quotes, add an extra one for each.  File names containing spaces must be
eclosed in double quotes.

Edit new.c 'get skeleton.c' 'bot'
E EPM.doc 'L /"help/c' EPM.scr '/:q.help'
E text 'c /don''t/do not/*'
E "d:\a long file name"

Return codes are placed in the RC universal variable. RC=0 means no error.

See also:  Host Editing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.37. EPATH, EP  (Search EPMPATH for Files) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    EPATH | EP filename  [pathname]

If the file specified is not in the current directory, this command will search
for it along the EPMPATH or pathname before calling EDIT. Useful when editing
.E files, this command is only included if the USE_APPEND configuration
constant is set to 1 (default=0), or if both WANT_SEARCH_PATH (default=0) and
WANT_GET_ENV (default=1) are set to 1.

Example:

    EP CHEESESHP.INV

Loads file CHEESESHP.INV if it is located along the EPMPATH.

If filename has an extension of .CMD then the default pathname will be PATH
rather than EPMPATH.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.38. ESCAPEKEY (Toggle Escape Key Action) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ESCAPEKEY [ON | OFF]

Use ESCAPEKEY to switch the escape key mode on or off; anything else tells you
the current value.  When escape key mode is on, the escape key can be used to
bring up the command line dialog (just like Ctrl+I). The default is escape key
mode off.

This command is only defined when TOGGLE_ESCAPE = 1 is included in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.39. ETPM, ET (Compile E Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    ETPM | ET [option] [source[.E] [output[.EX] ] ]

Compiles E language macros defined in source.e, and places the output into
output.ex. The new macros can be activated by loading output.ex into the editor
using the '/e' option when you call the editor from OS/2. For more information,
refer to section Compiling Macros.

If no output file is specified, ETPM assumes it to have the same filename as
the source file, but with an .EX extension. If no parameters are given, EPM.E
(or the file specified by MAINFILE) is compiled into EPM.EX.

The ETPM compiler will report any errors in your programming. The exact meaning
of ETPM compilation errors can be looked up in The EPM Editor Technical
Reference Manual.

The options for the ETPM command are:

/E or /e  redirects compiler error messages. Example usage:

    ETPM /e errs.txt epm.e epm.ex
This will cause all compilation error messages to be collected in the file
errs.txt.

/V or /v  lists the name of each file as it is being compiled.

ETPM searches the following directories (in the following order) for any .E
files that it needs:

 1. the current directory,
 2. the directories specified in the EPMPATH environment variable (if it
    exists),
 3. the directories in the DPATH environment variable,
 4. the same directory as the file ETPM.EXE.

See Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.40. EXPAND  (Syntax Expansion Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    EXPAND [ON|OFF]

Sets syntax expansion ON or OFF. If no parameters are given, current value is
displayed. Syntax expansion occurs when SPACE BAR or ENTER is pressed while a
file with a supported language specific extension is active (i.e. .E or .C or
.PAS or .CMD). Or you can start out with automatic expansion off by setting the
variable MY_EXPAND_ON to 0 in MYCNF.E; you can then force expansion to occur by
pressing Ctrl-X. See Including New Features into the Default Configuration for
more information about changing MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.41. FILE, F  (Quit and Save File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    FILE | F [/t] [filespec]

Saves the current file and then quits it, the same as SAVE plus QUIT. If no
filespec is given, the current name is used. You can use the equal sign = here
as a shorthand for either the current file's directory or filename, as in the
Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details. If the `/t'
option is given, tab compression is performed: a file is compressed by
substituting tabs for spaces where possible, i.e. when two or more spaces are
found close to a tab stop.

Note:  See the description of the Save command for a complete list of options.

Example:

    FILE GREEN.REM

Save the file as GREEN.REM, then quits the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.42. FILL  (Fill Mark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    FILL [character]

Will fill the marked block with the character specified. If no character is
specified, an entry box will be put up asking for one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.43. FINDFILE  (Search for File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    FINDFILE [filespec]

Same as LIST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.44. GET  (Insert File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    GET filespec

Gets a file and inserts its text on the next line after the cursor position.
You can use the equals sign = here as a shorthand for either the current file's
directory or filename, as in the Edit command. See the EDIT command for
details.

Example:

    GET SNORKELS.DAT

Loads file SNORKELS.DAT into the current file at the cursor position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.45. GO, GOMARK  (Go to Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    GO | GOMARK bookmark_name

Moves the cursor to the position given by the bookmark.

Example:

    GO fargle beans

Places the cursor at the location given by the bookmark fargle beans.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.46. HELP  (Load Help File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    HELP

Loads the EPMHELP.QHL file into a help browser window to display help
information.

Example:

    HELP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.47. INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR  (Insert Character Attributes) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR class attr_val [fstline lstline fstcol lstcol [fid]]

Use INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR in a Rexx macro to insert push and pop attributes as a
pair into a file.  class is the attribute class; attr_val is the attribute
value; fstline lstline fstcol lstcol refer to the beginning and ending
characters where the attributes are to be inserted (if omitted, then a mark
must exist, and the attributes are inserted at the beginning and end of the
mark; for a block mark, at the left and right sides of the mark on each line),
and fid is the identifier of the file into which the attributes should be
inserted (if omitted, it defaults to the current file).

/* Rexx macro to highlight the subject line */
/* Assumes .levelofattributesupport has '1' turned on */
/* to enable color display. */
BLACK = 0; BLUE = 1; GREEN = 2; CYAN = 3; RED = 4; MAGENTA = 5; BROWN = 6;
LIGHT_GREY = 7; DARK_GREY = 8; LIGHT_BLUE = 9; LIGHT_GREEN = 10;
LIGHT_CYAN = 11; LIGHT_RED = 12; LIGHT_MAGENTA = 13; YELLOW = 14;
WHITE = 15; BLACKB = 0; BLUEB = 16; GREENB = 32; CYANB = 48; REDB = 64;
MAGENTAB = 80; BROWNB = 96; GREYB =112; LIGHT_GREYB =112;
DARK_GREYB =128; LIGHT_BLUEB =144; LIGHT_GREENB =160; LIGHT_CYANB = 176;
LIGHT_REDB =192; LIGHT_MAGENTAB =208; YELLOWB =224; WHITEB =240;

'l /Subject:/c'
if rc = 0 then do        /* Found it! */
   'extract /line/col'
   'Insert_attr_val_pair 1' (Light_Magenta + Light_CyanB) ,
                         line.1 line.1 col.1 (col.1 + 7)
end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.48. INSERT_ATTRIBUTE  (Insert Character Attribute) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    INSERT_ATTRIBUTE class attr_val push_flag offset [col [line [fid]]]

Use INSERT_ATTRIBUTE in a Rexx macro to insert a character attribute into a
file.  class is the attribute class; attr_val is the attribute value; push_flag
is 1 for push, 0 for pop, or the value appropriate for the attribute class
specified. offset is the offset from the character at which the attribute
should be inserted; line and col are the position at which the attribute should
be inserted, and default to the cursor position; and fid is the identifier of
the file into which the attributes should be inserted (if omitted, it defaults
to the current file).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.49. KEY  (Repeat Keystroke) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    KEY #### character

Repeats character horizontally #### times. This can be quite powerful; for
example you can repeat an entire set of recorded keystrokes (Ctrl-T) 20 times.
Example:  KEY 80 =. This will write a line of 80 equal signs into your
document. character can be a normal ASCII character or a string representing an
extended ASCII character Example:  KEY 10 c-F8.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.50. L  (Locate Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    [L] /pattern[/ [- | + | M | A | C | E | R | F | G] ]

Locates text in the active file which matches pattern. The pattern delimiters
(here shown as /) can be any non-blank character which is not present in
pattern. The options following the second delimiter control the direction,
scope and upper/lower case sensitivity of the search. Additional options (X | W
| ~) are available as of version 6.02. The command name (L) may be omitted for
convenience, in which case the delimiter must be /. See details in Steps to
Search for a String.

After a locate command, pressing Ctrl-F will repeat the search with the same
options.

Example:

    L /to be or not to be

Searches for the first occurrence of the string to be or not to be.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.51. LINK  (Link File into EPM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LINK [filespec]

Will link the filespec.EX file into the currently executing version of EPM. See
Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.52. LIST, FILEFIND, FINDFILE    filespec ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LIST | FILEFIND | FINDFILE [filespec]

Loads a list of filenames that match filespec This may take a significant
amount of time (a minute or more) if you name a filespec that qualifies an
entire hard disk, such as list \*.*.  If the filespec is not given *.* is
assumed. Once you have the list, by placing the cursor on the name of a file,
you can press Alt-1 to edit that file.

Example:

    LIST C:\CLAY\GUMBY\POKEY.*

This command will list all of the files in the C:\CLAY\GUMBY\ directory which
match the specifier POKEY.*.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.53. LISTMARK  (List Bookmarks) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LISTMARK

Lists all existing bookmarks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.54. LONGNAMES  (Long Names Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LONGNAMES [ON | OFF]

Use LONGNAMES to switch the long names setting on or off; anything else tells
you the current value.  When long names is on, a file containing a .LONGNAMES
extended attribute will have the extended attribute value shown on the title
bar when being edited, rather than the actual file name.  This is useful if a
file with a long name is copied from an HPFS drive to a FAT drive and has the
original name saved in .LONGNAME; you will be able to see the long name instead
of the truncated name.  The default is long names mode off. This command is
only defined when the WANT_LONGNAMES option is enabled in the configuration
file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.55. LOCK  (Lock File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LOCK [filespec]

Will lock the current file, or the file specified, from other users in a LAN
networking situation.  Other applications are prevented from reading or writing
the file. Compare this with the /K option of the EDIT command, which prevents
other applications from writing the file, but which does allow them to read the
file.

This command is only defined when the WANT_LAN_SUPPORT option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.

Example:

    LOCK PARTICLE.MAN

Locks the file PARTICLE.MAN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.56. LOOPKEY  (Repeat Keystroke Vertically) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LOOPKEY [####|ALL] char

Allows the repeat of char in a vertical column. The character will be entered
#### times, proceeding vertically downward in the current column. (Compare this
to the KEY command, which repeats the key horizontally in the same row.) The
argument ALL can be given instead of a number, in which case the repetition
will continue to the end of the file. char can be a normal ASCII character or a
string representing an extended ASCII character


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.57. LOWERCASE  (Convert to Lowercase) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    LOWERCASE

Converts all uppercase alphabetic characters in the marked area to lowercase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.58. MARGINS, MA  (View/Change Margins) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MARGINS | MA [ left [ right [ new_pgph ] ] ]

Sets the margins with the parameters: column number on the left, column number
on the right, and number of spaces to indent the start of a new paragraph. The
new-paragraph indentation occurs when you press Alt-P, for example. Words typed
past the right margin are wrapped to the next line. left and new_pgph must be
less than right.

If no parameters are given, the current value is presented on the command line
to allow easy modification.  If right is omitted, it defaults to the current
value; if new_pgph is omitted, it defaults to left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.59. MAKETAGS  (Build a TAGS file) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MAKETAGS [ [@]file[...] | * ]

Builds a tags file from the list of source files given.  If a filename is
preceded by '@', this indicates that the file is actually a list of files.  If
an asterisk is given as an argument, a dialog will be presented in which the
user can enter the desired parameters.  This is primarily intended for use from
a menu or toolbar selection, but can also be used if you want to use the same
value as before, which the dialog has recorded.

Note:  The MakeTags command is available only in EPM 5.60 or above, and only if
       the WANT_TAGS configuration option is set. See the EPM 5.60 / 6.0x
       online help for a description of what tags files are.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.60. MARKWORD  (Mark Word) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MARKWORD

Marks the word under the cursor. This command is equivalent to the standard key
defintion of Alt+W.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.61. MATCHTAB  (Type of Tab Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MATCHTAB [ON | OFF]

If set on, the Tab and Shift-Tab keys use the previous line's columns for the
current line's tab stops. The previous line's columns are defined by the first
letter of each space-delimited word. If no parameter is given, the current
value is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.62. MATH  (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MATH expression

Computes expression using floating point arithmetic and displays the result on
the message line. Output is decimal. Input numbers may be hex (Ex. xff), octal
(Ex. o77), and decimal. Valid operators are +, -, /, *, % (integer division)
and // (remainder).

Example:

    MATH 121345342-121345340+1-3

When this is executed the result will be placed in the message line.  In this
case:

    math 121345342-121345340+1-3= 0

See Calculating Mathematical Expressions for further details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.63. MATHO  (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MATHO expression

Same as MATH command but output is octal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.64. MATHX  (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MATHX expression

Same as MATH command but output is hexadecimal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.65. MESSAGEBOX  (Bring up Message Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MESSAGEBOX

Brings up the Editor Messages box for review.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.66. MULT  (Multiply Numbers in Mark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    MULT

Multiplies the numbers in the marked area, and inserts the product in a new row
underneath the marked area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.67. NAME, N  (Name Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    NAME | N [filespec]

Renames the file in the editor buffer, but not on disk. The new name will be
used the next time you save the file. A useful way to avoid overwriting the
original.

Example:

    NAME ACHTUNG.U2

This command will name the current file ACHTUNG.U2.

If no name is given, the command line dialog will be presented prefilled with
Name current_file_name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.68. NEWWINDOW  (Create New Edit Window) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    NEWWINDOW

Use NEWWINDOW to save the current file if it has been changed, open a new
window containing the file, then quit the file in the current window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.69. OPEN, O  (Open New Edit Ring) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    OPEN | O { [ [options] filespec] [quoted-command] }

Loads specified files into a new window (and therefore a new ring). This OPEN
command is similar to the EDIT command, however, OPEN will open the file in a
new window, whereas EDIT will add the file to the edit ring of the current
window. Note that OPEN will open the file regardless of other open copies of
the file in other rings. The following options are valid when typing the OPEN
command on the command line dialog (in addition to those valid for the EDIT
command):

OPTION  EFFECT

/e      loads the compiled macros in the file specified after the /e switch.
        See section Compiling Macros for examples. Note: If you do not use this
        option, the default compiled macros are used, i.e. the file EPM.EX is
        interpreted by the editor.

=       is shorthand for same path as last specified at the OS/2 prompt, or
        same as current file's at the editor command line dialog.

The last option can save many keystrokes if you're editing several files in
another directory.

See the description of the Edit command for examples of using the = as part of
the file specifier, and for examples of passing commands to be executed in the
new edit window.

Return codes are placed in the RC universal variable. RC==0 means no error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.70. OPENPATH,OP  (Open File from Path) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    OPENPATH | OP [filename]

If the file specified is not in the current directory, this command will search
for it along the EPMPATH before calling OPEN. This command is only defined when
the EPATH command is defined; see the description of EPATH for the
requirements.  If no filename is given the command will open the new edit ring
with an untitled file.

Example:

    OP HOLLOW.MEN


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.71. OS2  (Execute OS/2 Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    OS2 command

Run the OS/2 command processor (as specified by the COMSPEC environment
variable) to execute a command. A new windowed OS/2 command session is started
to execute the command. Compare this with the QUIETSHELL command.

Example:

OS2 erase c:\*.*

This will execute the command erase c:\*.* in a new windowed OS/2 command
session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.72. PASTE  (Paste Text Into Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PASTE [C | B]

Moves text from the PM clipboard into EPM file at the current cursor location.
The text in the buffer can come from either an EPM file or any other PM
application. If no argument is given, the text is inserted as new lines in the
file.  If the argument is 'C', the text is inserted as a character stream, and
if the argument is 'B', the text is inserted as a block.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.73. PATH  (Display Path Variable) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PATH

Opens a temporary file and displays the current PATH setting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.74. POPMARK  (Pop Mark from Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    POPMARK

Pops the mark on the top of the Mark Stack and creates it.  If no mark has been
pushed onto the Mark Stack, this command will have no effect.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.75. POPPOS  (Pop Cursor Position from Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    POPPOS

Pops the cursor location from the top of the Position Stack and moves the
cursor to this location.  If the Position Stack is empty an error will occur.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.76. POSTME (Delay Command Execution) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

  POSTME command

Use POSTME to defer execution of a command.  The POSTME command posts its
argument back to the edit window as a command to be executed.  This would
normally be issued either from a Rexx command file or when passing commands to
EPM when starting up the editor.  For example, if you wanted to edit a file and
set the margins to 1 and 72, you might try the following:

start epm myfile 'ma 1 72'
This would not work as desired, however, because after the file is loaded and
the margins are set by your command, a DEFLOAD event occurs, which sets the
tabs and margins to the values saved from the Settings dialog. To get the
desired result, you must use the POSTME command to delay execution of the
MARGINS command until after the DEFLOAD processing has occurred:

start epm myfile 'postme ma 1 72'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.77. PRINT  (Print File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PRINT [printer_name]

Sends the marked block, or the entire file if there is no mark, to your
printer. Printer_name must be PRN, LPT1:, LPT2:, ... LPT9:, COM1: ... COM:4, or
a LAN device (e.g., \\server\printq). If no printer is specified then the block
or file will be output to the default printer.

Note:  Entering the print command will print in draft mode.  If you wish to
       print in WYSIWYG mode you must choose Print File... selection from the
       File menu.

See Printing a File for more details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.78. PROCESSBREAK  (Halt Command in Progress) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PROCESSBREAK

This command is executed when Ctrl+Break is pressed or Command / Halt Command
is selected from the action bar.  The default action is to do a

sayerror 'Macro halted by user'
but E macro programmers can add cleanup code if needed for their routines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.79. PROFILE  (Toggle Profile Setting) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PROFILE [ON | OFF]

Use PROFILE to switch the profile setting on or off; anything else tells you
the current value.  When PROFILE is on, a Rexx profile (PROFILE.ERX) is
searched for along the EPMPATH and PATH.  If found, it is executed, and passed
the same arguments that EPM was given.  This happens after EPM has processed
the arguments.  The default is profile mode off.

This command is only defined when WANT_PROFILE = 'SWITCH' is included in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.80. PROCESSFONTREQUEST  (Set a Font) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

PROCESSFONTREQUEST  fontname.fontsize.fontsel.setfont.markedonly[.fg.bg]

The PROCESSFONTREQUEST command is used internally by the Style and Settings
dialogs, but it can also be issued by the user from the EPM command line or
from a macro. The parameters are:

fontname  the name of the font to be set.

fontsize  the size of the font to be set; can be any point size (for ATM
          fonts), or can be a width and height (in pixels) that match an
          existing bitmap font.  Note that ATM fonts can be displayed in any
          size, even though only a limited number of sizes are shown in the
          font dialogs. The size can be represented as in integer point size,
          or DDnnn for nnn deci-points, or HHhhWWww for a bitmapped font hh
          pixels high and ww pixels wide.

fontsel   the attributes of the font to be set; can be any combination of:

   1   Italic
   2   Underscore
   8   Outline
   16  Strikeout
   32  Bold

setfont   A flag (0 or 1) specifying whether the font should be made the
          default font for all future edit windows.  Only processed if
          markedonly is 0.

markedonly A flag (0 or 1) specifying whether the font change should apply to
          the marked area only, or should be made the base font for the file.

fg        Optional foreground color (0 - 15; see COLORS.E) used if markedonly
          is 1.

bg        Optional background color (0 - 15; see COLORS.E) used if markedonly
          is 1.

Examples:

Set base font to 16-point Times New Roman:
   PROCESSFONTREQUEST Times New Roman.16.0.0.0
Display the marked text in 17 1/2-point Helvetica Bold Italic:
   PROCESSFONTREQUEST Helvetica.DD175.33.0.1
Change base font to 20x9 System Monospaced, and make it permanent:
   PROCESSFONTREQUEST System Monospaced.HH20WW9.0.1.0
Display the marked text in a 24-point outline Tms Rmn font, with a
magenta foreground and a light cyan background:
   PROCESSFONTREQUEST Tms Rmn.24.8.0.1.5.11


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.81. PROOF  (Spell Check Document) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PROOF

The proof command begins the spell check facility. When the PROOF command is
issued, EPM begins spell checking at the cursor position and continues until a
suspect word is found, or until the end of the document is reached. If a
suspect word is found, a spell check dialog box will appear. The upper portion
of the dialog box contains possible corrections. The bottom of the dialog box
asks you to choose: Replace, Cancel, Next, Temp. Add, Add, Edit or Help. If the
word appears spelled correctly in the list of possible corrections, use the
mouse to click on the correct spelling (thereby highlighting your choice) and
then click on the Replace entry at the bottom of the dialog box. EPM will make
the substitution automatically. (You can double-click on any word word in the
list to select Replace for that word.) Choose the Cancel option to stop spell
checking. Choose the Next option to ignore the word and continue with spell
checking. Choose Temp. Add to mark the word as correctly spelled for the
current PROOF session, but not update your addenda file. Choose Add to add the
word to your addenda file for future spell checks. Choose Edit to be given a
chance to edit the word; the result will be substituted for the word in the
file and then rechecked. Choose Help to display a help panel describing what
each button does.

Note:  Spell checking requires LEXAM.DLL, which is included with some other IBM
       products (e.g., OS/2 TCP/IP).  It is not available directly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.82. PROOFWORD  (Spell Check Current Word) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PROOFWORD  [Force]

Proofs the word that the cursor is on. It brings up the spell checking dialog
box if the word is spelled incorectly. See the PROOF command for more
information on the spell checking dialog box. If an argument of FORCE (may be
abbreviated down to one character) is given, the dialog will be presented even
if the word is spelled correctly.

Note:  Spell checking requires LEXAM.DLL, which is included with some other IBM
       products (e.g., OS/2 TCP/IP).  It is not available directly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.83. PUSHMARK  (Push Current Mark onto Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PUSHMARK

Pushes the location of the current mark into a stack to allow it to be recalled
later using a POPMARK command.

Note:  Only the position of the mark relative to the file is saved, so if lines
       are added to the file before the saved position, and then the mark is
       popped, different text will be marked than was originally.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.84. PUSHPOS  (Push Current Position onto Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PUSHPOS

Pushes the location of the current cursor position into a stack to allow it to
be recalled later using a POPPOS command.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.85. PUT  (Append Text to a File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    PUT [filespec]

Writes the marked text area to the named file. If the named file already exists
it's appended rather than overwritten.

For convenience, filespec can be omitted if you wish to repeat a PUT to the
same file. PUT commands without a filespec will reuse the last-specified name.

If there is no mark, the entire current file is PUT. You can use the equals
sign = here as a shorthand for either the directory or filename, as in the Edit
command.

Example:

    PUT IT.NOW

Will append the marked text to the end of the file IT.NOW.

See the Edit entry in this section for details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.86. QDATE, QD  (Query System Date) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    QDATE | QD

Displays the current system date in the form:

   Today is Sunday July 21, 1992.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.87. QL, QLINK, QLINKED  (Query Link Status) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    QL | QLINK | QLINKED [filespec]

Checks if the E module specified in filespec is linked. For example, to see if
LAMPDQ has been linked you could type from the command line dialog:

   QLINKED lampdq
Depending on your configuration EPM will return:

o 'Can't find LAMPDQ on disk' - LAMPDQ.EX does not exist in the EPMPATH (it may
  be in the uncompiled LAMPDQ.E form);
o 'LAMPDQ is not linked' - LAMPDQ has not been included in EPM;
o 'LAMPDQ is linked as module #somenum' - LAMPDQ has been included in EPM.
See Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.88. QS, QUIETSHELL  (Quiet OS/2 Shell) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    QS | QUIETSHELL command

Executes the OS/2 command specified by command without displaying any results
from the command. This is useful when you want to execute an OS/2 command and
avoid a macro front-end.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.89. QTIME, QT  (Query Time) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    QTIME | QT

Displays the current system time in the form:

   The time is 3:12:31 am.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.90. QUIT, Q  (Quit Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    QUIT | Q

Quits current file and exits the ring if no more files are left. If the visible
ring is empty, then the editor exits with return code 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.91. RC  (Display Return Code) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    RC command

Displays return code of command. A good way to determine the exact result of a
command. A number will be shown which can be looked up in section Return Codes.
This command should be used in the following way:

   rc tabs 35 10 20
This command will result in the error number 272 ("Error in tab settings")
being displayed below the command line dialog.

RC can also be used to verify that OS/2 commands completed successfully without
having to open a command prompt or redirect output:

   RC erase temp.fil
This will display a RC of 0 if the command completed successfully.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.92. REFLOW_ALL  (Reflow Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    REFLOW_ALL

Reflows all of the current file to the margins.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.93. REGISTER_MOUSE  (Register Mouse Event) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    REGISTER_MOUSE which button action shifts command

Use REGISTER_MOUSE in a Rexx macro to associate a command with a mouse event.
which is 1 for the global mouse table or 0 for the local; button is the mouse
button (1, 2 or 3), action is one of:

Action    meaning

CLICK     Pressing and releasing the mouse button produces a click.

SECONDCLK follows click when the mouse is double-clicked.

BEGINDRAG this is called when the mouse button is depressed and the mouse is
          moved.

ENDDRAG   this is called when the mouse button is released after dragging it.

CANCELDRAG. this is called when the drag is cancelled (by pressing Esc before
          releaseing the mouse button).
shifts is 0 for no shift, or the sum of any combination of 1 for the shift key,
2 for the Ctrl key, and 4 for the Alt key. command is the command to be
executed when this mouse event occurs, or blank if the event should be ignored.

Note:  The standard mouse definitions issue a register_mouse for ENDDRAG and
       CANCELDRAG as part of the BEGINDRAG processing.

/* Register an action for Ctrl+Alt+Double-click MB1 */
'register_mouse 1 1 SECONDCLK 6 rx do_line'

/* Do_Line.erx */
'MH_gotoposition'  /* Move cursor to mouse position */
'extract /line/getline'
if line.1 > 0 then
   getline.1  /* Execute the line as a command */


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.94. RELINK  (Relink Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    RELINK [filespec]

Compiles and links a macro into a currently running version of EPM. See Using
the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.95. RENAME  (Rename File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    RENAME

Allows you to rename the current file. This command presents the Rename dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.96. RX  (Execute a Rexx Macro) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    RX | EPMREXX  macro_name [macro_args]
 Executes the specified Rexx macro.  The default extension is .erx.  If the
drive and directory are not specified, the macro will be searched for (by the
Rexx executor) along the PATH.

Note:  The Rexx profile, PROFILE.ERX, is searched for along the EPMPATH as well
       as the PATH, but this search is done by EPM, not Rexx, in order to avoid
       an error message if the profile is enabled but PROFILE.ERX does not exist.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.97. SAVE, S  (Save Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SAVE | S [options] [filespec]

Saves the file to disk, using the current name if none is specified. You can
use the equals sign = here as a shorthand for either the directory or filename,
as you can in the Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details.

OPTION    EFFECT
/q        Saves quietly; the "Saved to" message is not given.
/s        Trailing spaces are stripped from each line as it is written out.
/ns       Do not strip spaces; this is the default.
/t        Tab compression is performed: a file is compressed by substituting
          tabs for spaces where possible, i.e. when two or more spaces are
          found close to a tab stop.
/nt       No Tabs; this can be used to override default_save_options = '/t'
/ne       Prevents the EOF from being written at the end of the file.
/u        Saves the file in Unix format - i.e., each line should be terminated
          with just a line feed, and no EOF should be added at the End of File.
          This is useful when saving files to NFS-mounted drives on an AIX or
          Unix system.
/l        (EPM 5.51 & below) This says to save the file in standard OS/2 format
          - each line should be terminated with a carriage return followed by a
          line feed; an EOF character is added at the end if SET EOF 1 is in
          effect.  This is the default.

          (EPM 5.60 & above) This says to save the file with each line
          terminated with just a line feed.
/o        (EPM 5.60 & above) This says to save the file in standard OS/2 format
          - each line should be terminated with a carriage return followed by a
          line feed; an EOF character is added at the end if SET EOF 1 is in
          effect.  This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.98. SAYERROR  (Display Error Code or Message) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SAYERROR expression

Use SAYERROR to display an error code or message in the message area.

If expression is the number 0 or 1, any pending error messages are discarded
and not displayed.  0 will refresh the screen; 1 will not.

If expression is any number other than 0 or 1, the interpreter displays the
string corresponding to that numbered error message.  Error messages and their
corresponding return codes are listed in the EPM Technical Reference.

If expression is not a number, that text will be displayed on the message line.
This is useful in Rexx macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.99. SELECT_ALL  (Select Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SELECT_ALL

Creates a mark which encompasses the entire file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.100. SET  (Execute an OS/2 SET Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SET

Executes an OS/2 SET command. All the SET parameters will be displayed in a
temporary file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.101. SETMARKP  (Set Permanent Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SETMARKP bookmarkname

Sets a permanent bookmark at the current cursor position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.102. SETMOUSEPOINTER  (Set Mouse Pointer) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SETMOUSEPOINTER pointerstyle

Sets the mouse pointer to style 1 - 14.  See the _POINTER constants defined in
STDCONST.E, or the online help, for a description of each style.

This command is only defined when EPM_POINTER = 'switch' is included in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.103. SETSCROLLS  (Toggle Scroll Bars) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SETSCROLLS

Toggles the scroll bars (both the horizontal and vertical) on or off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.104. SHELL  (Start OS/2 Shell) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SHELL

Use SHELL to create an EPM command shell session.  If the MYCNF.E contains
WANT_EPM_SHELL='HIDDEN', then the first time you enter SHELL in an edit window,
two new entries will be added to the Command menu.  Create command shell
creates a new shell window, and Write to shell... lets you write a string to
the shell window.  If the shell window is waiting at an OS/2 command prompt,
then you can enter a command to be executed by either:

 1. Select Command.
 2. Select Write to shell....
 3. Type the text to be written to the shell.
 4. Select OK.
or

 1. Type the text in the shell window following the prompt.
 2. Press the Enter key.

If the string to be written to the shell is in response to a program prompt,
then you must perform the first sequence; the second method won't write
anything to the shell. (The standard Enter key definition recognizes the
default EPM_SHELL_PROMPT and automatically performs a Write to shell. Note that
this works as well for repeating previously entered commands.)

The shell can be used for running any non-fullscreen OS/2 program.  The output
from the program is inserted in the shell window as it is generated, even if
you switch to some other file in the edit ring.

This command is only defined when the WANT_SHELL option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.105. SHOWMENU  (Activate Menu) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SHOWMENU menuname

Use SHOWMENU to activate the action bar named menuname. Changes made with the
BuildSubMenu and BuildMenuItem commands will not be seen until the updated menu
is displayed with ShowMenu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.106. SORT, SORTDLL  (Sort Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SORT | SORTDLL [R] [C] [I]

If no area is marked, sorts the entire file. If an area is marked, the entire
lines are sorted with the marked columns treated as the sort key.  The options
are as follows:

R   Sorts in reverse (descending) order.
C   Sorts according to collating order, as indicated by your country and code
    page settings.
I   Sorts ignoring case.

If two lines have equal keys they are left in the same relative order. This
allows you to sort a directory listing, for example, first by extension and
again by filename; during the second sort, lines with equal filenames will be
left in extension order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.107. STAY  (Toggle SETSTAY) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    STAY ON|OFF

Allows SETSTAY option to be changed from within EPM. When STAY is specified
with ON then the cursor will not be moved after a change command has been
issued. With STAY set to OFF, the cursor will move to the last occurrence of a
change when the change command is issued.

This command is only defined when SETSTAY = '?' is included in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.108. STDFILE_READ  (Read a File From STDIN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    STDFILE_READ

Reads a file in from STDIN. This is most useful when the STDIN has been
redirected from a keyboard to another device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.109. STDFILE_WRITE  (Write a File to STDOUT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    STDFILE_WRITE

Writes a file to STDOUT. This command is most useful to write files when the
STDOUT device has been redirected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.110. SUBJECT  (Set File Subject) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SUBJECT

Use SUBJECT to display, set, or change the file subject field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.111. SWAPMARK  (Swap Mark with Mark on Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SWAPMARK

Swaps the current mark with the top mark in the mark stack. Will fail if no
mark exists in the current window.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.112. SWAPPOS  (Swap Position with Position on Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    SWAPPOS

Swaps the current position of the cursor with the top position in the position
stack.

This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.113. TABKEY  (Toggle Tab Key Mode) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TABKEY [ON | OFF]

Use TABKEY to switch the tab key mode on or off; anything else tells you the
current value.  When tab key mode is on, the tab key will enter a tab
character.  When TAB key mode is off, the tab key will move the cursor to the
next tab stop without typing in a tab character.  The default is tab key mode
off.

You must issue this command from the Command window.

This command is only defined when the TOGGLE_TAB option is enabled in the
configuration file MYCNF.E.

To save the current tab key mode setting as your permanent default:

 1. Select Options.
 2. Select Save options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.114. TABS  (Set Tabs) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TABS n1 [n2...n32]

Sets tab stops used by Tab and Shift-Tab keys. If only one tab stop is
specified, e.g. TABS 8, the editor interprets this as meaning that the user
wants 32 tabs set, each 8 spaces apart, beginning with column 1. In this case,
the result would be the same as issuing the following command: TABS 1 9 17 25
... 247 The tab stops must must be listed in ascending order. If no tab values
are listed then the current tab settings are returned in the command dialog
window (so they can be modified, if desired). Syntax errors in the tab values
will be ignored. See Setting Tabs for more information on setting tabs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.115. TOGGLECONTROL  (Toggle Window Visibility) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TOGGLECONTROL windownum [0|1]

Toggles the window specified by windownum. If the second argument is a 1; then
EPM will attempt to turn window on. If the second argument is a 0; then EPM
will attempt to turn the window off.  If no second argument is given, then if
the window is off it will be turned on; and if the window is on, then it will
be turned off. Useful windownum values are:

7  = the status line
8  = the message line
9  = the vertical scroll bar
10 = the horizontal scroll bar
20 = the ring icons
22 = the drag/drop text icon (OS/2 1.3 only)
23 = the status and message line position (top or bottom of window)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.116. TOP  (Go to Top of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TOP

Moves to the top of the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.117. TRIM  (Trim Window) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TRIM

Use TRIM to resize the edit window so that no partial characters can be seen at
the right or bottom edge of the edit window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.118. TYPE  (Set Type of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    TYPE

Use TYPE to display, set, or change the file type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.119. UNIVERSAL  (Change Universal Variables) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    UNIVERSAL variable_name [value]

Use UNIVERSAL in a Rexx macro to update some internal universal variables
without having to recompile the macros. variable_name can be one of

default_search_options Options used by the Locate command and initial values
          for the Search dialog.

default_edit_options Options used by the Edit command

default_save_options Options used by the Save command
value is the value to be set in the universal variable, and can be blank. The
value of these variables is inserted before any options passed on the command
line, so these defaults can be overridden on any specific command.

/* Profile.erx - initializations for a new edit window */
      /* Make the default search be case-insensitive */
'universal default_search_options C'
      /* No Tabs - expand them when loading a file */
'universal default_edit_options /nt'
      /* Strip trailing blanks when saving a file */
'universal default_save_options /s'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.120. UNLINK  (Unlink EPM Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    UNLINK [filespec]

Removes an E module (ie .EX code) from a version of EPM running in memory. This
is useful to remove unused or temporary code to save space. See Using the
RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.121. UNLOCK  (Unlock File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    UNLOCK [filename]

Unlocks a file that was locked using the LOCK command or EDIT /K.

This command is only defined if WANT_LAN_SUPPORT was requested.

Example:

    UNLOCK E:\FISH\WANDA\TANK.KEN

Unlocks the file TANK.KEN from the directory E:\FISH\WANDA.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.122. UPPERCASE  (Convert Text to Uppercase) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    UPPERCASE

Converts all lowercase alphabetic characters in the marked area to uppercase
letters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.123. VER  (Display Version) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    VER

Displays the version of EPM. For example:

EPM Version 5.51


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.124. VERIFY  (Spell Check Current Word) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    VERIFY  [Force]

Same as the PROOFWORD command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.125. VOL  (Query Volume Label) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    VOL [drive_letter]

Displays the current drive's volume label information in a temporary file. This
command is like the OS/2 VOL command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.126. XCOM  (Execute Interal Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Syntax:

    XCOM built-in command

Executes internal (built-in) command, ignoring user-defined (DEFC) commands.
Prefix your command line dialog with this when you want to be sure to execute
the original EPM version of a command, not the user's redefinition.

Note:  The primary intent of XCOM is for executing internal editor commands, to
       avoid a user's redefinitions.

 A typical case is xcom e filespec which executes the unembellished EPM edit
command. (One reason for doing this is speed; if you're loading a file only for
temporary look-up purposes you don't need the extra checking for a host file
name, etc.)

But this can be confusing because the executed command might end up being an
external OS2 program. If EPM cannot find the command internally it will look to
OS2, in which case the effect is the same as typing OS2 command. This is not
the normal usage, however. If you know in advance that you want a OS2 command
as opposed to a DEFC, you can use the QUIETSHELL prefix.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options / Preferences / Settings to activate the Settings dialog, which
has pages to let you configure certain features without requiring recompilation
of the macros. The pages of the Settings dialog are briefly described below;
you can select the Help button while viewing any page in the dialog to get more
detailed information.

Tabs        Set the default TABS setting.

Margins     Set the default left, right, and paragraph MARGINS settings.

Colors      Set the default colors for normal text, marked (selected) text, the
            status line, and the message line.

Paths       Set the temporary path, autosave path, and (if spell-checking
            support is enabled) the dictionary and addenda file locations.

Autosave    Set the default AUTOSAVE count.

Fonts       Set the default font in which text should be displayed.

Keys        Configure the actions performed for various combinations of the
            Enter keys.

            Note:  This page will only be present if the .ex files were
                   compiled with ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS set to 1 in the MYCNF.E.


Change all the appropriate values to your desired settings, then select the
Save button. Your preferences will be saved in the EPM.INI file. (Only modified
pages are actually saved.) EPM.INI is checked for EPM settings when opening a
new edit window. This means that the configuration values will override any
values set in MYCNF.E and compiled into the .ex files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Host Editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information on the use of the host editing features of EPM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EPM allows editing of IBM mainframe files from your PC. The host can have
either a VM or MVS operating system. Your PC must use a terminal emulator
package which supports file transfer between the two systems. EPM supports the
OS2 Communications Manager using the ALMCOPY command for uploading and
downloading.

To specify a host file name, the dummy drive letter H: is used. Below is an
example of editing a CMS file from within EPM.

   edit h:profile exec

When EPM sees the H: it expects a CMS file specification to follow (i.e.
filename filetype [filemode]). Note the use of spaces, not periods.  The
default filemode is A.

Host filenames can be given to any of the following EPM commands.

    PUT
    GET
    S, SAVE
    APPEND
    E, EDIT
    F, FILE
    O, OPEN

Notice that the LIST command cannot take a host file specification.

If your machine crashes while saving a host file there will be a temporary file
created on your PC. If you use the standard host support, these temporary files
have names like eeeeeeee.nnn, where nnn is a system supplied number. The files
will be in the TEMP_PATH directory. If you use the E3EMUL host support, these
temporary files have names like filename.ext, where ext is the first three
characters of the host filetype. The files will be in the SAVEPATH directory.
(If you do not have a MY_SAVEPATH in your MYCNF.E, this will default to the
AUTOSAVE_PATH.) In addition, E3EMUL users will be asked if they wish to save
the file as filename.TMP, which won't be overwritten the next time they try to
edit the same host file.

In order for host editing to work, the default assumptions are:

 1. The OS2 communications manager has been installed and is working

 2. You're logged on to a VM host system and your session has no program
    active.

 3. The package 'ALMCOPY' has been installed properly. (i.e. ALMCOPY.EXE can be
    found in the current path.)

 4. You don't want multiple logical terminal session support.

If you want to change any of the above defaults you'll have to put your
configuration information in MYCNF.E and recompile EPM.  See the HOST_SUPPORT
configuration constant.

A common change would be to support multiple logical terminals. A good way to
do that is to use E3EMUL, or the SRPI package available as part of LaMail/PM.
It is strongly suggested you read their documentation if installing them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. Using E3EMUL for host editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

E3EMUL allows host file editing through IBM licensed emulators, such as IBM's
OS/2 Extended Edition Communications Manager. E3EMUL even works with multiple
sessions, such as Communication Manager's multiple 3270 emulation sessions. You
may specify a default LT (Logical Terminal)/window to use, but you may edit a
file from any or all host sessions during an editing session.

To differentiate between LT windows, you can specify a host session ID between
the h and the colon, e.g.:

       edit ha:profile exec
       edit hb:test file

E3EMUL does strict syntax checking on your specified filename. This is because
it tries to determine what sort of file you have asked to edit. The usage of
predetermined defaults allows you to be less than specific when editing host
files. For example, you can edit the documentation for EPM on the host with the
command:

                E EPM SCRIPT
E3EMUL fills in the rest, and carries the full filename of HA:EPM SCRIPT A
through the editing session. Ambiguous references are resolved with a bias
toward VM filenames.

Note:  When entering host file names on the OS/2 command line (as opposed to
from EPM's command line), you should always specify the H: prefix. This is
because otherwise EPM prefixes the names specified with the current directory,
and so when E3EMUL gets the command line, it looks like c:\.profile c:\exec,
and isn't recognised as a host file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Including New Features into the Default Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Many users will wish to change or add features to EPM, but will not care to
learn the full E macro language. Many new features can be added by installing
add-on packages. Often the only change needed to add such a package to the
editor is to add one line to one of the .E files that includes that package
into the file.

The preferred place to put the include statement is in a file of your own, not
in the distributed .E files.  It is tempting to put your includes in the main
EPM.E file, but this will cause you extra work when new versions of EPM are
released; you'd need to re-add your includes to the new EPM.E. Instead, put
your includes in a file named MYKEYS.E, MYSTUFF.E, MYMAIN.E, MYSELECT.E, or
MYKEYSET.E. (Listed in order of usefulness; most packages can be installed in
MYKEYS.E or MYSTUFF.E.) The E compiler will automatically include those
filenames if they exist.

Here are some sample includes to show how the MY*.E files might be used.

o MYKEYS.E should contain any code which defines new keys. Perhaps you have
  redefined one or more key(s) in a file called NEWKEYS.E, as follows:

    def c_k=
       Getline Line
       InsertLine Line, .line + 1

  In this case, the Ctrl-K key is defined to duplicate the current line.

  To activate this new definition, simply add the following line to the
  MYKEYS.E:

       include 'newkeys.e'

  Including a file in the file MYKEYS.E insures that the key will be recognized
  in the proper place, and not be included in a special-case keyset.
o MYSTUFF.E should contain packages which define non-key features, such as
  commands and procedures, for example:

       include 'e3code.e'

  Note:  Most users will not care whether a package defines a key or a command.
  Don't worry about the distinction, since in the current EPM it makes no
  difference. You can include a package in either MYKEYS.E or MYSTUFF.E.
o MYMAIN.E will typically contain small pieces of code to set options at E's
  start-up, especially options that we didn't provide as part of the standard
  configuration file STDCNF.E. Any code in MYMAIN.E will be included at the end
  of E's start-up code (DEFMAIN).
o MYSELECT.E can contain anything you want to be executed whenever you select a
  different file. Typical tasks here are setting tabs and margins based on
  filetype, or selecting keysets based on filetype (this is how the
  syntax-editing keys are selected).
o MYKEYSET.E is the least frequently used addition.  Not many users will define
  an entirely new keyset.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Changing the Default Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A distinguishing feature of EPM is its configurability. It allows the user to
change its standard modes of operation, as well as add new commands and delete
unwanted commands. This is possible because a significant portion of the editor
(known as macro definitions) is written in a high level programming language
(the E language). This language can be learned easily by experienced
programmers using The EPM Editor Technical Reference Manual and the delivered
source code as a guide.

EPM has a Quick Configuration option to allow for easy update of some of the
most popular configuration variables (i.e. colors and margins). See Changing
Common Default Values for information on the shortcut approach. Not all
variables are included there. This section explains how to change any and all
of the default features in EPM.

Note:  If you change the same values in MYCNF.E and in the Quick Configure
menu, those in Quick Configure will take precedence.

You can also change the way the editor performs by changing the source code,
which comes as a collection of ASCII files with extension .E. The source code
is translated by a compiler (ETPM) into a file with extension .EX which will be
loaded automatically by EPM as it starts execution. (See Compiling Macros.) The
standard file EPM.EX is delivered in the initial EPM package and contains
default information.

Making elaborate changes, for example redefining commands or keys to perform
differently, involves learning the E language and modifying the code. However,
more simple changes to the layout of the editor can be made much more easily.
Constants set in the files STDCNF.E and COLORS.E control the colors displayed
on the screen, margin settings, tab settings, cursor sizes, insert mode status,
terminal emulator to be used for editing host files, etc. You need very little
experience to create a MYCNF.E that tailors the editor to your preferences
without having to learn the E programming language. A sample MYCNF.SMP is
included in EMACROS.FLS as a guide. You can override the STDCNF.E settings by
using MYCNF.E. This has two advantages:

 1. You can easily upgrade to new versions by dropping in the new files. No
    more need to merge your modified STDCNF.E with our new one, or to worry
    about accidentally overlaying your carefully customized version with ours.

 2. Macro writers can include your MYCNF and use the constants the way that you
    defined them even if their routines aren't included in the base set of E
    code.

Therefore, we strongly suggest that you create a MYCNF.E file if you want to
make changes to the standard configuration. Do not make changes directly to
STDCNF.E or COLORS.E (or, for that matter, to any of the distributed files).

In the following, where you read change FOO in STDCNF, you should interpret
this to mean find the line defining FOO in STDCNF.E, copy that to your MYCNF.E,
and change the value in the copy.

There are three sections to STDCNF.E, setting different types of defaults, and
each can be overridden in the MYCNF.E file. The first section contains SET
statements, the second section defines constants, and the third section
initializes various global variables. To override the first section, you simply
include the appropriate SET statement in your MYCNF. (The ones in STDCNF.E are
commented out, and exist just to document the defaults.) To override the second
section, simply define the constants. To override the third section, define a
MY_variablename set to the desired value.

Comments in STDCNF.E explain this in more detail, and examples of each can be
seen in the sample MYCNF.SMP.

Note:  One user we know recommends copying the entire STDCNF.E into MYCNF.E in
order to have all the spelling and the internal documentation handy. This is
not a good idea. STDCNF.E contains some code executed when an EPM window is
opened. MYCNF.E should contain no executable code. It should contain only SET,
CONST and DEFINE statements. This is so that separately compiled routines can
include MYCNF.E to pick up your preferences, without having any unexpected side
effects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. The Defaults ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section of MYCNF.E lists all of the modifiable options, their default
values, and all possible values. You simply have to add the appropriate
assignment to your MYCNF.E.

After making one or more of the changes described here, you must compile
(translate) the .E files. This can be done two ways. At the editor command
line, type the command ETPM. This will invoke ETPM.EXE with the default
filenames. The advantage of doing this from within EPM is the ease of
correcting a syntax error (if there is one). EPM will automatically load the
offending file and position the cursor to the error (or occasionally one line
after it). You can also go to an OS/2 command prompt, and issue etpm epm from
there. Before either method, make sure your current directory is the one where
the E files are stored.

String values of configuration options need not be entirely uppercase. A string
value may be composed of any combination of upper and lower case letters. All
strings will be converted to entirely uppercase letters by ETPM (the compiler)
when comparisons are done.

See Compiling Macros for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. Sample Reconfiguration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

One of the most common questions is how to change the default colors and
margins. This section will walk a user through the steps needed to reconfigure
EPM's default colors and margins.

 1. Edit the file MYCNF.E.
 2. enter the following lines lines of text into the MYCNF file:

            const
              DEFAULT_MARGINS = '1 75 5'

            compile if defined('BLACK')
            define
              WINDOWCOLOR = YELLOW + BLUEB
              TEXTCOLOR = WINDOWCOLOR
              MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR = WINDOWCOLOR
              DRAGCOLOR = LIGHT_BLUE + GREENB
            compile endif

 3. Use F4 to save MYCNF and quit.
 4. Move to the OS/2 prompt.
 5. Change directories to the directory where your .E files are stored.
 6. Enter the command:

                etpm epm

 7. Providing no typing errors were made (ETPM will report these), the changes
    should be made. Opening a new EPM edit window should show the changes to
    the color scheme and the margin setups.
These changes are only examples. See the next section for more information on
what these changes mean and how to customize EPM for your own particular needs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. Summary of Configuration Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following section lists all the configuration constants used by EPM, along
with their possible values.

Note:  The majority of these constants should follow a CONST statement in the
       MYCNF.E.  The exception is the constants that set a color (DRAGCOLOR,
       MARKCOLOR, MESSAGECOLOR, STATUSCOLOR, TEXTCOLOR); these should follow a
       DEFINE statement.  The reason for this is that they are already defined
       in COLORS.E, and constants set via CONST can not be redefined with
       different values, but compile-time variables set via DEFINE can be.

ADD_BREAK_AFTER_DEFAULT
          Should a break statement be added after a default when doing C syntax
          expansion.
ADDENDASUPPORT
          Include addenda-file support in spell-checking.
ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP
          Should Prompting and Info at Top choices be connected.
ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
          Include support for syntax assist and user-defined keysets.
ALTERNATE_PASTE
          Alternate paste mode - as a line, block, or character mark.
ASSIST_TRIGGER
          Use Enter or Ctrl+Enter to trigger syntax assist.
AUTOSAVE_PATH
          Default autosave path.
BACKUP_PATH
          Default backup path.
BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS
          Should Alt+letter perform the editor-defined action, or activate the
          corresponding action bar menu.
BLOCK_ALT_KEY
          Should tapping the Alt key activate the action bar.
C_ENTER_ACTION
          Action performed by the Ctrl+Enter key.
C_EXTENSIONS
          Extensions assumed to be C files for syntax expansion.
C_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for C files.
C_MARGINS
          Define margins for C files.
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for C should be included.
C_SYNTAX_INDENT
          Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist for C files.
C_TABS
          Define tabs for C files.
CALL_USER_FTO
          Enable a user exit for setting file transfer options when saving a
          host file.
CHECK_FOR_LEXAM
          Should the presence of the spell-checking library be checked at run
          time.
CLICK_ONLY_GIVES_FOCUS
          Should clicking on an edit window just give focus, or also move the
          cursor.
COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR
          Specify the color that lines with compiler errors will be displayed
          in, when EPM is called from the IBM Workframe/2.
CORE_STUFF
          Include CORE-specific definitions.
CPP_EXTENSIONS
          Extensions assumed to be C++ files for syntax expansion.
CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for C++ should be included.
DEBUG
          Include debug messages in E3EMUL.
DECIMAL
          Specify the character used for the decimal point.
DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE
          Specify how many changes should occur between autosaves.
DEFAULT_FILEMODE
          Specify the default filemode for VM files.
DEFAULT_MARGINS
          Define margins for files without extension-specific defaults.
DEFAULT_PASTE
          Default paste mode - as a line, block, or character mark.
DEFAULT_TABS
          Define tabs for files without extension-specific defaults.
DIRECTORYOF_STRING
          Specify the "Directory of" string that appears when a DIR command is
          executed.
DRAGCOLOR
          Specify the color used when drag-marking.
DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS
          Specify whether a drag will start a mark even if a mark already
          exists.
DUPLICATES_ALLOWED
          Specify whether duplicate bookmark names are allowed.
DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE
          Specify whether the cursor shape should be changable at runtime.
DYNASPELL_BEEP
          Specify whether dynamic spell-checking should beep when an
          unrecognized word is typed.
ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS
          Specify whether support for dynamically changing the actions assigned
          to the Enter key combinations is included.
ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT
          Specify whether support for the print dialog is included.
ENTER_ACTION
          Action performed by the Enter key.
EPATH
          Specify what path should be searched for .e files.
EPM_POINTER
          Specify the default pointer type.
EPM_SHELL_PROMPT
          Specify the prompt to be used in the shell window.
ETPM_CMD
          Specify the (fully-qualified) name of the ETPM command.
EXTRA_EX
          Specify whether code should be split between EPM.EX and EXTRA.EX
          (required for normal-sized configurations in versions prior to
          6.00c).
E_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for E files.
E_MARGINS
          Define margins for E files.
E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for C should be included.
E_SYNTAX_INDENT
          Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist for E files.
E_TABS
          Define tabs for E files.
FIX_CURSOR
          Set this if the cursor disappears after saving a host file.
HELPFILENAME
          Specify the name of the file loaded when Help / Quick reference is
          selected.
HIGHLIGHT_COLOR
          Specify that found strings should be circled.
HOSTCOPYDRIVE
          Specify the host drive letter used for the HOSTCOPY command.
HOSTCOPYOPTIONS
          Specify default options to be passed to the HOSTCOPY command.
HOSTDRIVE
          Specify what letter should be used to indicate host files.
HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED
          Require that the host drive letter be specifed when using E3EMUL.
HOST_LT_REQUIRED
          Require that the host logical terminal ID be specifed to indicate a
          host file.
HOST_SUPPORT
          Specify the type of support to be included for editing files on a VM
          or MVS host.
HTML_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for HTML files.
INCLUDE_MATHLIB
          Specify whether math support routines should be compiled in or linked
          when needed.
INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT
          Specify whether menu support should be included.
INCLUDE_STANDARD_CONTEXT_MENU
          Specify whether the standard pop-up menus should be included.
INCLUDE_STD_MENUS
          Specify whether the standard menus should be included.
INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT
          Specify whether support for the IBM Workframe/2 should be included.
IPF_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for IPF files.
I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT
          Specify whether a ';' should be supplied after a 'default' in C
          syntax assist.
I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH
          Specify whether 'case' should be aligned under 'switch' in C syntax
          assist.
JAVA_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for Java files.
JAVA_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for Java should be included.
KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN
          Specify whether the cursor should be allowed to be scolled off the
          screen using the scroll bars.
KEEP_TAGS_FILE_LOADED
          Specify whether the TAGS file should be kept loaded.
KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE
          Specify the default index file to be used for keyword help.
LINK_HOST_SUPPORT
          Specify whether host support should be linked as an external file.
LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT
          Specify whether support should be included for file-specific mouse
          definitions.
LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE
          Specify the circle style used when a Locate is done.
LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1
          Specify the circle color used when a Locate is done.
LOG_TAG_MATCHES
          Specify that "hits" from the tag search should be logged during a
          MAKETAGS.
MAINFILE
          Specify the file to be compiled by ETPM if no name is given.
MARKCOLOR
          Specify the color to be used for marked text.
MENU_LIMIT
          Allow for the inclusion of a Ring menu.  (Not recommended.)
MESSAGECOLOR
          Specify the color to be used for the message line.
MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR
          Specify the color to be used for marked text in a modified file.
MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR
          Specify the color to be used for normal text in a modified file.
MOUSE_SUPPORT
          Specify whether (and how) mouse support should be included.
MVS
          Specify whether support should be included for editing files on an
          MVS host.
MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME
          Specify a default addenda file name for spell-checking.
MY_APPNAME
          Specify the application name to be used in the .INI file.
MY_BINOPTIONS
          Specify default options for binary file transfers.
MY_CENTER_SEARCH
          Specify the default initial value for CENTER_SEARCH, which controls
          whether a found target is centered in the screen.
MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH
          Specify whether CUA marking should initially be on or off.
MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL
          Specify the initial mode for blocking the action bar accelerators.
MY_CURSORDIMENSIONS
          Specify the size of the cursor for insert and replace mode.
MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS
          Specify default options to be used on EDIT commands.
MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS
          Specify default options to be used on SAVE commands.
MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS
          Specify default options to be used on LOCATE commands.
MY_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE
          Specify default toolbar definition file.
MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME
          Specify the default dictionary filename to be used for spell
          checking.
MY_EXPAND_ON
          Specify whether syntax expansion should initially be on or off.
MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME
          Specify the name to be used for the EXTRA.EX file.
MY_FTOPTIONS
          Specify default file transfer options for ASCII files.
MY_HOSTCMD
          Specify the default command to be used for issuing host commands.
MY_HOSTCOPY
          Specify the default command to be used for transferring files to the
          host.
MY_HOSTDRIVE
          Specify what letter should be used to indicate host files.
MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP
          Specify the initial value for the JOIN_AFTER_WRAP switch.
MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES
          Specify whether temporary files should be erased after use during
          host file editing.
MY_LT
          Specify the default logical terminal to be used for host file
          editing.
MY_MATCHTAB_ON
          Specify the initial MATCHTAB setting.
MY_MENU_PROMPT
          Specify whether menu prompting should start out on or off.
MY_MOUSE_POINTER
          Specify the initial mouse pointer style.
MY_MOUSESTYLE
          Specify the default mouse behavior in Advanced Marking mode.
MY_PRINTER
          Specify the default printer.
MY_REXX_PROFILE
          Specify whether profile support should initially be on or off.
MY_RING_ENABLED
          Specify whether the presence of the edit ring should initially be
          hidden.
MY_SAVEPATH
          Specify a default SAVEPATH for host file editing.
MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS
          Specify if EPM should convert multiple spaces to tabs when saving.
MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE
          Specify additional file types that should be considered to be SCRIPT
          files during spell checking.
MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES
          Specify the initial value for LONGNAMES support.
MY_STAY
          Specify the initial STAY default.
MY_STREAM_MODE
          Specify whether stream mode should start out on or off.
MY_TWO_SPACES
          Specify whether 1 or 2 spaces should be used at the end of a sentence
          during text reflow.
NLS_LANGUAGE
          Specify the language to be used for text strings.
NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS
          Specify if duplicate bookmarks should be disallowed.
NO_ESCAPE
          Specify if the Escape key should not activate the command dialog.
PERL_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for Perl files.
PROCESSNAME_CMD
          Specify the command used when the filename is directly edited on the
          title bar.
PROOF_CIRCLE_STYLE
          Specify the circle style used when PROOF finds a questionable word.
PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR1
          Specify the circle color used when PROOF finds a questionable word.
PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED
          Specify that the PROOF dialog always appear in a fixed location,
          instead of under the word being proofed.
P_MARGINS
          Define margins for Pascal files.
P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for Pascal should be included.
P_SYNTAX_INDENT
          Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist for Pascal
          files.
P_TABS
          Define tabs for Pascal files.
RC_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for RC files.
RECEIVE_CMD
          Specify the name of the RECEIVE command.
REFLOW_LIKE_PE
          Specify that Alt+P paragraph reflow should move the cursor to the
          next paragraph on completion.
RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA
          Specify whether the case of words in the addenda should be respected.
RESPECT_SCROLL_LOCK
          Specify whether the Scroll Lock state should be respected.
RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT
          Specify whether the mark should be restored after a sort operation.
REXX_EXTENSIONS
          Extensions assumed to be Rexx files for syntax expansion.
REXX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for Rexx files.
REXX_MARGINS
          Define margins for Rexx files.
REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
          Specify whether syntax assistance for Rexx should be included.
REXX_SYNTAX_CASE
          Specify what case keywords should be used for syntax assistance for
          Rexx.
REXX_SYNTAX_FORCE_CASE
          Specify whether the case of user-typed keywords should be changed.
REXX_SYNTAX_INDENT
          Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist for Rexx files.
REXX_SYNTAX_NO_ELSE
          Specify whether an Else should be inserted after an If statement.
REXX_TABS
          Define tabs for Rexx files.
RING_OPTIONAL
          Specify whether EPM should include support for hiding the presence of
          the edit ring.
RUNTIME
          Specify if runtime support for changing E3EMUL settings should be
          included.
SCRIPT_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for Script files.
SEND_CMD
          Specify the name of the SEND command.
SETSTAY
          Specify where the cursor should be after a Change command.
SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY
          Specify if shifting a block should also move text to the right of the
          mark.
SHOW_EACH_PROCEDURE
          Specify if each procedure discovered while creating a tags file
          should be announced.
SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD
          Specify how modified files should be displayed.
SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT
          Specify the text to be included in the title bar for modified files.
SMARTFILE
          Specify if the File key should Quit if there were no changes.
SMARTSAVE
          Specify if the Save key should prompt you if there were no changes.
SORT_BOOKMARKS
          Specify whether the bookmarks list should appear in sorted order.
SORT_TYPE
          Specify the type of sort routine that should be included.
SPELL_SUPPORT
          Specify whether spell-checking support should be included.
STATUSCOLOR
          Specify te default color for the status line.
STATUS_TEMPLATE
          Specify the default text that should appear on the status line.
STD_MENU_NAME
          Specify the name of the file used to build the action bar.
SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON
          Specify if Book Icon should appear on the Options menu.
SUPPORT_TECHREF
          Specify if View Technical Reference should appear on the Help menu.
SUPPORT_USER_EXITS
          Specify if hooks for user exits should be included.
SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE
          Specify if View User's Guide should appear on the Help menu.
SYNTAX_INDENT
          Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist.
SYS_MONOSPACED_SIZE
          Specify the default System Monospaced font size.
TAGS_ANYWHERE
          Specify whether or not TAGS should be searched for only starting in
          column 1.
TEMP_FILENAME
          Specify the name of a temporary file ( including path).
TEMP_PATH
          Specify the path to be used for temporary files.
TERMINATE_COMMENTS
          Specify whether comments should be terminated as part of syntax
          assist.
TEX_FILETYPES
          Specify the file types assumed to be TeX files.
TEXTCOLOR
          Specify the default color to be used for normal text.
TEX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING
          Specify whether keyword highlighting should automatically be turned
          on for TeX files.
TOGGLE_ESCAPE
          Specify whether the ESCAPEKEY command should be defined.
TOGGLE_TAB
          Specify whether the TABKEY command should be defined.
TOP_OF_FILE_VALID
          Specify whether the user should be allowed to position the cursor on
          line 0.
TRASH_TEMP_FILES
          Specify whether temporary files should get the "Quitting file" dialog
          if an attempt is made to quit them when they have been modified.
UNDERLINE_CURSOR
          Specify that the cursor should be an underline instead of a vertical
          bar.
UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE
          Set to automatically unmark after a move mark operation.
USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION
          Specify if ANSI C notation should be used for the MAIN expansion in C
          syntax assist.
USE_APPEND
          Specify if files not found in the current directory should be
          searched for in the DPATH.
USE_EHLLAPI
          Specify if EHLLAPI calls should be used to invoke SEND and RECEIVE.
USING
          Specify the file transfer protocol to be used when editing host
          files.
VALID_LTS
          Specify the list of valid logical terminal identifiers.
VANILLA
          Omit all user-written macro code.
VM
          Specify if support should be included for editing files on a VM host.
WANT_ALL
          Specify if the ALL command should be included.
WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE
          Specify if support should be included for saving information in an
          application INI file.
WANT_BITMAP_BACKGROUND
          Specify if a background bitmap should be present.
WANT_BOOKMARKS
          Specify if bookmark support should be included.
WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT
          Specify if braces should appear below the statement in C syntax
          assist.
WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED
          Specify if the braces below the statement should be indented in C
          syntax assist.
WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING
          Specify if bracket-matching code should be included.
WANT_CHAR_OPS
          Specify if support for character marks should be included.
WANT_CUA_MARKING
          Specify if support for the CUA-style marking should be included.
WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT
          Specify if support for DBCS text should be included.
WANT_DM_BUFFER
          Specify if text deleted via a delete_mark operation should be saved
          in a buffer.
WANT_DOSUTIL
          Specify whether the OS-related functions in DOSUTIL.E should be
          included.
WANT_DRAW
          Specify if the DRAW command should be included.
WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS
          Specify if support should be included for dynamic menu prompts.
WANT_EBOOKIE
          Specify if support for EBOOKIE should be included.
WANT_END_COMMENTED
          Specify if a comment should be added to the end of a statement or
          block in syntax assist.
WANT_EPM_SHELL
          Specify if support for the EPM shell window should be included.
WANT_ET_COMMAND
          Specify if support for the ETPM command should be included.
WANT_GET_ENV
          Specify if the GET_ENV routine should be included.
WANT_KEYWORD_HELP
          Specify if support for keyword help should be included.
WANT_LAN_SUPPORT
          Specify if file locking support should be included.
WANT_LONGNAMES
          Specify if support of the .LONGNAME EA should be included.
WANT_MATH
          Specify if the math-related commands should be included.
WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS
          Specify if the Preferences and Frame Controls menus should stay
          active.
WANT_PROFILE
          Specify if support for a Rexx profile should be included.
WANT_REXX
          Specify if support for Rexx should be included.
WANT_SEARCH_PATH
          Specify is the search_path routine should be included.
WANT_SHIFT_MARKING
          Specify is the search_path routine should be included.
WANT_STACK_CMDS
          Specify if the (mark and cursor position) stack commands should be
          included.
WANT_STREAM_MODE
          Specify if support for stream-mode editing should be included.
WANT_STREAM_INDENTED
          Specify if a line split by stream-mode editing should be indented to
          match the previous line.
WANT_SYS_MONOSPACED
          Specify if default font should be System Monospaced.
WANT_TAGS
          Specify if support for tags files should be included.
WANT_TINY_ICONS
          Specify if tiny icons should be used for the built-in toolbar.
WANT_TOOLBAR
          Specify if support for the toolbar should be included.
WANT_TRUNCATED_WARNING
          Specify if a pop-up should be given when a "Lines truncated" warning
          occurs.
WORD_MARK_TYPE
          Specify if character or block marks should be used for marking words.
WPS_SUPPORT
          Specify if support for the Workplace Shell Edit Object should be
          included.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.1. ADD_BREAK_AFTER_DEFAULT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ADD_BREAK_AFTER_DEFAULT in MYCNF.E to control whether or not a break
statement is added after a default statement when doing C syntax expansion.

The default value for ADD_BREAK_AFTER_DEFAULT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't add a break.

1     Add a break.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.2. ADDENDASUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ADDENDASUPPORT in MYCNF.E to control whether or not support for an addenda
file (user additions to dictionary) is included as part of the spell checking
support.

The default value for ADDENDASUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.3. ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Prompting and Info
at Top choices of the Frame Controls pull-right menu on the Options menu are
inter-connected.

The default value for ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP is 1. Possible values are:

0     When Info at Top is turned on, Prompting will be turned off; when
      Prompting is turned on, Info at Top will be turned off.  The net effect
      will be that selecting a menu can never have the menu hiding the prompt.

1     The menu selections are independent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.4. ALTERNATE_KEYSETS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ALTERNATE_KEYSETS in MYCNF.E to control whether or not support for
alternate keysets is included.  This acts as a master switch for
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST, E_SYNTAX_ASSIST, P_SYNTAX_ASSIST, and REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST, as
well as controlling whether MYKEYSET.E is included.

The default value for ALTERNATE_KEYSETS is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't define any other keysets.

1     Define the keysets indicated by the above constants and in MYKEYSET.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.5. ALTERNATE_PASTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ALTERNATE_PASTE in MYCNF.E to specify the alternate paste style that should
be used (when Ctrl+Shift+Insert is pressed).

The possible values for ALTERNATE_PASTE are the same as for DEFAULT_PASTE.

The default value for ALTERNATE_PASTE depends on the value set for
DEFAULT_PASTE.  If DEFAULT_PASTE pastes in character (or stream) mode, then
ALTERNATE_PASTE will default to pasting in line mode; otherwise,
ALTERNATE_PASTE will default to pasting in character mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.6. ASSIST_TRIGGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ASSIST_TRIGGER in MYCNF.E to specify which key should trigger syntax
assist.

The default value for ASSIST_TRIGGER is 'ENTER' Possible values are:

'ENTER'     The Enter key will be the trigger.

'C_ENTER'   the Ctrl+Enter key will be the trigger.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.7. AUTOSAVE_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set AUTOSAVE_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory in which autosave files
will be saved.

The default value for AUTOSAVE_PATH is the null string, which means that the
current directory will be used.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Paths page of the Settings dialog.

Related configuration constants:

DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.8. BACKUP_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set BACKUP_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory in which backup files will
be saved.  Whenever a file is saved, the old version will be copied to the
backup directory.

The default value for BACKUP_PATH is the null string, which means that no
backup files will be kept. It can be set to '=', which means that the directory
of the file being saved will be used, or to any subdirectory (which must end
with a trailing backslash).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.9. BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Whenever an action bar entry has a mnemonic defined, PM automatically defines
it as an accelerator key.  This blocks the normal action defined for that key
in EPM.  Taking NLS translations into account, this would essentially mean
giving up all of the Alt+letter keys.  Since we found this unacceptable, we
defined the keys as accelerators ourself in order to bypass the PM definition.

Set BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS in MYCNF.E to control whether or not these
accelerator keys are definined by EPM.

The default value for BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't block the PM definitions, so that Alt+C will go to the action bar
      Command menu, etc.

1     Define accelerator table entries to block the PM defaults, so Alt+C will
      perform a Copy Mark operation, etc.

'SWITCH' Support both marking modes, and allow the user to change back and
      forth between them (via an entry on the Preferences selection of the
      Options menu).

Related configuration constants:

MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.10. BLOCK_ALT_KEY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set BLOCK_ALT_KEY in MYCNF.E to define the Alt key as an accelerator.  PM
defines the Alt key so that pressing and releasing it will give focus to the
action bar.  Some users find this annoying, so EPM lets you redefine it to not
do this.

The default value for BLOCK_ALT_KEY is 0 Possible values are:

0     Pressing and releasing the Alt key will go to the action bar.

1     Pressing and releasing the Alt key will just beep.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.11. C_ENTER_ACTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_ENTER_ACTION in MYCNF.E to specify what action should be performed by the
Ctrl+Enter key.  If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0, this controls the behavior
of a my_c_enter() routine that will be called when the Ctrl+Enter key is
pressed.  If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 1, this only sets the initial value
for the Ctrl+Enter and Ctrl+PadEnter keys.

The default value for C_ENTER_ACTION is 'NEXTLINE' Possible values are:

'ADDLINE'   Insert a line after the current line.

'NEXTLINE'  Move to the next line without inserting a line.

'ADDATEND'  ADDLINE if on last line, else NEXTLINE.

'DEPENDS'   NEXTLINE if in insert_mode, else ADDLINE.

'DEPENDS+'  ADDLINE if on last line, else DEPENDS.

'STREAM'    Act like stream editors; Ctrl+Enter splits a line.

''          Don't define a my_c_enter() routine; user will supply one (in
            MYSTUFF.E).  Only meaningful if ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.12. C_EXTENSIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_EXTENSIONS in MYCNF.E to specify what extensions (or filetypes) should be
considered to be C files for syntax expansion if C_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.

The default value for C_EXTENSIONS is 'C H SQC'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.13. C_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing C files.

The default value for C_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for C files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a C file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.14. C_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to specify what the margins should be when editing C
files if C_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.

The default value for C_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
than the maximum length of a line.  (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
special margins should be set for C files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.15. C_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the C
language is included.

The default value for C_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ADD_BREAK_AFTER_DEFAULT
ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
C_EXTENSIONS
C_MARGINS
C_SYNTAX_INDENT
C_TABS
CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST
I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT
I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH
MY_EXPAND_ON
TERMINATE_COMMENTS
WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT
WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED
WANT_END_COMMENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.16. C_SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
indented when using syntax assist for C files.

The default value for C_SYNTAX_INDENT is SYNTAX_INDENT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.17. C_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set C_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for C files.

The default value for C_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for C files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.18. CALL_USER_FTO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CALL_USER_FTO in MYCNF.E to have a User_FTO() routine called to set the
file transfer options when saving a host file (if HOST_SUPPORT is set to
'EMUL').  See E3EMUL.E for a sample User_FTO() routine.

The default value for CALL_USER_FTO is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't try to call a user exit.

1     Call the user exit when saving.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.19. CHECK_FOR_LEXAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CHECK_FOR_LEXAM in MYCNF.E to have the LEXAM DLL checked for at run time,
and spell support added to the Options menu only if it is found.  This also
controls whether the Dictionary File and Personal Dictionary entries are
present on the Paths page of the Settings dialog.

The default value for CHECK_FOR_LEXAM is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't see if LEXAM.DLL is present.

1     Check to see if LEXAM.DLL is present.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.20. CLICK_ONLY_GIVES_FOCUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CLICK_ONLY_GIVES_FOCUS in MYCNF.E to specify whether clicking mouse button
1 on an edit window just give focus to the edit window, or if it should also
move the cursor.

The default value for CLICK_ONLY_GIVES_FOCUS is 'ADVANCED' (so that in CUA
mode, the behavior will be as in the OS/2 System Editor and all PM entry
fields). Possible values are:

0     Always perform the action associated with mouse button 1.

'ADVANCED' Just give focus to the edit window if in Advanced marking mode;
      perform the action associated with mouse button 1 if in CUA marking mode.

'CUA' Just give focus to the edit window if in CUA marking mode; perform the
      action associated with mouse button 1 if in Advanced marking mode.

1     Just give focus to the edit window.

Note:  This option is only supported in version 6.03 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.21. COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR in MYCNF.E to control what color lines containing
errors are displayed in when EPM is invoked from the Workframe/2.

The default value for COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR is 244, or red on a white
background. Possible values are any combination of foreground and background
colors as defined in COLORS.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.22. CORE_STUFF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CORE_STUFF in MYCNF.E to determine whether CORE-specific code is included.

The default value for CORE_STUFF is 0. Possible values are:

0     Not being compiled for the CORE environment.

1     Being compiled for the CORE environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.23. CPP_EXTENSIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CPP_EXTENSIONS in MYCNF.E to specify what extensions (or filetypes) should
be considered to be C files for syntax expansion if CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST is
enabled.

The default value for CPP_EXTENSIONS is 'CPP HPP CXX HXX JAV JAVA'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.24. CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for C++ is
included whenever syntax assist for the C language is included.

The default value for CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
JAVA_SYNTAX_ASSIST
MY_EXPAND_ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.25. DEBUG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEBUG in MYCNF.E to cause debugging messages to be output by E3EMUL.E.
This is not normally set by the end user.

The default value for DEBUG is 0. Possible values are:

0     No debug messages.

1     Give messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.26. DECIMAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DECIMAL in MYCNF.E to specify what character is used to represent the
decimal point in the math-related commands.

The default value for DECIMAL is '.'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.27. DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE in MYCNF.E to specify the number of changes that can be
made to a file before an autosave is performed.

The default value for DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE is 100.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Autosave page of the Settings dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.28. DEFAULT_FILEMODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEFAULT_FILEMODE in MYCNF.E to specify what filemode should be assumed by
E3EMUL for host files whose file mode is not specified.

The default value for DEFAULT_FILEMODE is 'A'. Some users might prefer '*', but
this should not be set before determining what effect a file mode of '*' will
have when saving a host file using your file transfer program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.29. DEFAULT_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEFAULT_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to specify the initial default margins for files
not having syntax assist support available.

The default value for DEFAULT_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one
less than the maximum length of a line.  (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions
prior to 5.60.)  You can specify any valid margins.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Margins page of the Settings dialog.

Related configuration constants:

C_MARGINS
E_MARGINS
P_MARGINS
REXX_MARGINS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.30. DEFAULT_PASTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEFAULT_PASTE in MYCNF.E to specify which type of PASTE should be performed
by the Shift+Insert key.

The default value for DEFAULT_PASTE is 'C'. Possible values are:

''    Paste as new lines.

'B'   Paste as a block.

'C'   Paste as a character stream.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.31. DEFAULT_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DEFAULT_TABS in MYCNF.E to specify the initial default tabs for files not
having syntax assist support available.

The default value for DEFAULT_TABS is 8.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.32. DIRECTORYOF_STRING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DIRECTORYOF_STRING in MYCNF.E to the string equivalent to "Directory of"
that is output by the OS/2 DIR command.

The default value for DIRECTORYOF_STRING is DIR_OF__MSG, which is defined in
ENGLISH.E or your NLS language version. You might want to specify a different
value if you are using the English-language version of EPM on a non-English
version of OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.33. DRAGCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DRAGCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify what color should be used to display the
marked area while drag-marking with the mouse.

If DRAGCOLOR is not set, then the MARKCOLOR will be used.

Note:  DRAGCOLOR is used for line and character marks; inverse video is used
       for performance reasons when drag-marking a block mark.

Note:  Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.34. DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS in MYCNF.E to specify whether dragging the mouse should
always start a new mark.

The default value for DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't start a new mark if one exists; instead, warn the user.

1     Always start a new mark; do an Unmark first if necessary.

Note:  This applies only to advanced marking mode; a new mark is always started
       in the CUA-style basic marking mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.35. DUPLICATES_ALLOWED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DUPLICATES_ALLOWED in MYCNF.E to specify whether more than one instance of
a host file is allowed to be loaded into an edit ring when using E3EMUL.E for
host support.

The default value for DUPLICATES_ALLOWED is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't allow the same host file to appear more than once in the ring.

1     Allow multiple copies.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.36. DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE in MYCNF.E to specify that the cursor style should be
changeable at run time (via the Cursor_Style command).

The default value for DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't allow the cursor shape to be changed at run time.

1     Allow the cursor shape to be changed at run time.

Related configuration constants:

MY_CURSORDIMENSIONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.37. DYNASPELL_BEEP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set DYNASPELL_BEEP in MYCNF.E to specify whether dynamic spell-checking should
beep when an unrecognized word is typed.  A message will be displayed on the
message line whether or not the beep is enabled.

The default value for DYNASPELL_BEEP is 'ALARM'. Possible values are:

0     Don't beep when an unrecognized word is typed.

'ALARM' Execute a WinAlarm() call to issue a warning when an unrecognized word
      is typed.  This will perform whatever action you have associated with
      system warnings.

1     Beep when an unrecognized word is typed. People who have the multimedia
      extensions installed, with an audio file associated with the system
      warning, and are on a slow system, might prefer to simply get a beep.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.38. ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be
included for dynamically setting the action performed by the Enter keys (Enter,
Alt+Enter, Ctrl+Enter, Shift+Enter, PadEnter, Alt+PadEnter, Ctrl+PadEnter,
Shift+PadEnter).

The default value for ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is 0. Possible values are:

0     The Ctrl+Enter and Ctrl+PadEnter keys are set to the action indicated by
      the C_ENTER_ACTION configuration constant, and the remaining Enter keys
      are set to the action indicated by the ENTER_ACTION configuration
      constant.

1     The Enter keys can be set dynamically via a Keys page on the Settings
      dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.39. ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Print entries on
the File and Edit menus bring up the Print Dialog, or simply print the file or
marked area (in draft mode) to the default printer

The default value for ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:

0     Print menu items print to the default printer

1     Print menu items activate the Print Dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.40. ENTER_ACTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ENTER_ACTION in MYCNF.E to specify what action should be performed by the
Enter keys (Enter, Alt+Enter, Shify+Enter, PadEnter,Alt+PadEnter,
Shift+PadEnter). If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0, this controls the behavior
of a my_enter() routine that will be called when one of the Enter keys is
pressed.  If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 1, this only sets the initial value
for the Enter keys.

The default value for ENTER_ACTION is 'ADDLINE'. Possible values are:

'ADDLINE'   Insert a line after the current line.

'NEXTLINE'  Move to the next line without inserting a line.

'ADDATEND'  ADDLINE if on last line, else NEXTLINE.

'DEPENDS'   ADDLINE if in insert_mode, else NEXTLINE.

'DEPENDS+'  ADDLINE if on last line, else DEPENDS.

'STREAM'    Act like stream editors; Enter splits a line at the cursor
            position.

''          Don't define a my_enter() routine; user will supply one (in
            MYSTUFF.E).  Only meaningful if ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.41. EPATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set EPATH in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the environment variable used by
EPM to search for editor-specific files.  For example, the EPATH and OPENPATH
commands use this as the default path to search.

The default value for EPATH is 'EPMPATH'.

Note:  The editor path is also set internally by the editor, and can not be
       changed by the user.  EPATH should be left as 'EPMPATH' when compiling
       macros for EPM, and set to 'LAMPATH' when compiling macros for LaMail.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.42. EPM_POINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set EPM_POINTER in MYCNF.E to specify what shape you want the EPM mouse pointer
to have.

The default value for EPM_POINTER is TEXT_POINTER, or 2. Possible values are
listed in STDCONST.E; see the _POINTER constants.

compile if defined(SYSTEM_POINTER)
   const
      EPM_POINTER = SYSTEM_POINTER  -- I prefer the arrow pointer
compile endif

EPM_POINTER can also be set to 'switch', to indicate that the mouse pointer
shape should be dynamically changable at run time (via the SetMousePointer
command). If it is, then the my_MOUSE_POINTER constant can be used to specify
an initial value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.43. EPM_SHELL_PROMPT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set EPM_SHELL_PROMPT in MYCNF.E to specify a string that will be written to a
newly-created shell window. This string will generally be a PROMPT command.

The default value for EPM_SHELL_PROMPT is '@prompt epm: $p $g'.

Note:  Support for automatically performing a Write to shell when the Enter key
       is pressed in a shell window is only included if EPM_SHELL_PROMPT is
       left at the default value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.44. ETPM_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set ETPM_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the external ETPM command used
by the macro ETPM and RELINK commands. This constant will generally be used if
ETPM.EXE is not in the PATH, or if a different version of ETPM would be found
earlier in the PATH. For example:

const
compile if EVERSION >= 6
   ETPM_CMD = 'd:\epm\600\etpm'
compile elseif EVERSION >= 5.60
   ETPM_CMD = 'd:\epm\560\etpm'
compile elseif EVERSION >= 5.51
   ETPM_CMD = 'd:\epm\551\etpm'
compile endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.45. EXTRA_EX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set EXTRA_EX in MYCNF.E to specify that the base function normally included in
EPM.EX is to be split between EPM.EX and EXTRA.EX.  The standard configuration
is too large to fit into a single 64k .ex file, so this constant must be set to
1 unless you are setting other constants to omit a large amount of code.

The default value for EXTRA_EX is 0. Possible values are:

0     EPM.EX will be a stand-alone file.

1     EPM.EX will automatically link EXTRA.EX at startup.

Note:  When EXTRA_EX is 1, the EPM action bar is built in EXTRA.EX while most
       of the commands used by it are built in EPM.EX.  This means that
       whenever a configuration constant affecting the action bar is changed,
       both EPM and EXTRA should be recompiled.

Note:  Version 6.00c and above can create and use a larger .ex file, so this
       constant need not be set in those versions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.46. E_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set E_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing E files.

The default value for E_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for E files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a *.E file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.47. E_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set E_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when editing
E files if E_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.

The default value for E_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
than the maximum length of a line.  (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
special margins should be set for E files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.48. E_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set E_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the E
language is included.

The default value for E_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
E_MARGINS
E_SYNTAX_INDENT
E_TABS
MY_EXPAND_ON
TERMINATE_COMMENTS
WANT_END_COMMENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.49. E_SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set E_SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
indented when using syntax assist for E files.

The default value for E_SYNTAX_INDENT is SYNTAX_INDENT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.50. E_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set E_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for E files.

The default value for E_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for E files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.51. FIX_CURSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set FIX_CURSOR in MYCNF.E to work around a bug in ALMCOPY which sometimes
results in the cursor not being restored after a file transfer.  If you use
ALMCOPY for host file transfer, and "lose" the text cursor after loading or
saving a host file, set FIX_CURSOR=1.

The default value for FIX_CURSOR is 0. Possible values are:

0     Do nothing special.

1     Fix the cursor after calling ALMCOPY.

Note:  FIX_CURSOR=1 only applies if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.52. HELPFILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HELPFILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the file to be loaded when Quick
Reference is selected from the Help menu.

The default value for HELPFILENAME is 'epmhelp.qhl'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.53. HIGHLIGHT_COLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HIGHLIGHT_COLOR in MYCNF.E to specify that after a successful Locate or
repeat_find (Ctrl+F) operation, the target string should be highlighted.  In
versions of EPM prior to 5.50, the value was the color used to highlight the
text.  In 5.50 and above, the text is highlighted by having a circle drawn
around it, and the actual value used for HIGHLIGHT_COLOR is irrelevant.

The default value for HIGHLIGHT_COLOR is that it is not set.

See Also:

o LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE to select the style circle drawn.
o LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 to select the color in which the circle is drawn.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.54. HOSTCOPYDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOSTCOPYDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify the drive letter used to indicate the
host session to the HOSTCOPY command.  This lets you change the HOSTDRIVE and
the HOSTCOPYDRIVE independently.

Note:  If HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. then HOSTCOPYDRIVE should only contain
       a drive letter.  If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then
       HOSTCOPYDRIVE should contain a drive letter followed by a colon.

The default value for HOSTCOPYDRIVE is 'H' or 'H:'. It should not be changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.55. HOSTCOPYOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOSTCOPYOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify options that should be included as
part of the HOSTCOPY command if HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD'.
If HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. then my_FTOPTIONS and my_BINOPTIONS are used
instead.

The default value for HOSTCOPYOPTIONS is the null string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.56. HOSTDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOSTDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify what drive letter should be used to
represent the host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD'.

The default value for HOSTDRIVE is 'H:'. (The trailing colon is required.)
Users who have a real H: drive on their machine might want to set it to some
other value - for example, 'V:' to represent VM files.

Related configuration constants:

my_HOSTDRIVE (for E3EMUL users)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.57. HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED in MYCNF.E to specify that the host drive letter is
required when editing host files using HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'. Normally, E3EMUL
will attempt to figure out whether the argument of an Edit command is a host
file or a workstation file; if it is ambiguous, it will be assumed to represent
a host file.

The default value for HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED is 0. Possible values are:

0     Assume that ambiguous strings not containing a drive specifier represent
      host files.

1     Don't assume that a file is a host file unless the host drive letter is
      given explicitly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.58. HOST_LT_REQUIRED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOST_LT_REQUIRED in MYCNF.E to specify that a logical terminal ID is
required when editing host files using HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'. This lets users
with a local H: drive use H: to refer to the local drive, and HA: to refer to
the host session (LT A).

The default value for HOST_LT_REQUIRED is 0 Possible values are:

0     Don't require the LT.

1     Require the LT.

Related configuration constants:

my_HOSTDRIVE
HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.59. HOST_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HOST_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify the type of support included in EPM for
editing files that reside on a VM or MVS host.  In order to load or save a host
file, you must be logged on to the host through Communications Manager.

The default value for HOST_SUPPORT is 'STD' when compiling EPM.E, or '' when
compiling SMALL.E. Possible values are:

'STD' Use the standard host support method, SAVELOAD.E. This only supports a
      single VM host session, and requires an external file transfer program
      (such as Almcopy). It does not support Communication Manager's Send /
      Receive.

'EMUL' Use the enhanced host support method, E3EMUL.E. This supports multiple
      host sessions (logical terminals), both VM and MVS files, Send / Receive,
      and is the most flexible.

'SRPI' Use the enhanced host support method, SLSRPI.E. This supports multiple
      VM host sessions, and is the fastest file transfer method (since files
      are loaded and saved directly between the workstation's memory and the
      host disk, rather than going through a temporary file on the
      workstations's disk).  The drawback is that a SRPI server must be running
      on the host in order to load or save files.  SLSRPI.E and the required
      SRPI servers are available in the LaMail22 package within IBM, and are
      not currently available externally.

''    Use SLNOHOST.E and omit host support entirely.

Related configuration constants:

LINK_HOST_SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.60. HTML_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set HTML_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing HTML files.

The default value for HTML_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for HTML files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever an HTML file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.61. INCLUDE_MATHLIB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set INCLUDE_MATHLIB in MYCNF.E to specify whether the bulk of the MATH-related
commands are included in the base .ex file or linked separately when needed.

The default value for INCLUDE_MATHLIB is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit most of the support; dynamically link MATHLIB.EX when any of MATH,
      MATHX, MATHO, ADD, or MULT are entered.

1     Include the MATHLIB support in the base .ex file.

Note:  The value of INCLUDE_MATHLIB is ignored if EXTRA_EX is 1; in this case,
       EXTRA_EX will include all of MATH.E.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_MATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.62. INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for the
EPM action bar is included.

The default value for INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Note:  This would only be set by someone providing their own action bar, either
       in the macro language or by using the E Toolkit.

Related configuration constants:

INCLUDE_STD_MENUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.63. INCLUDE_STANDARD_CONTEXT_MENU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set INCLUDE_STANDARD_CONTEXT_MENU in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the
standard EPM pop-up menu is defined.

The default value for INCLUDE_STANDARD_CONTEXT_MENU is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit the standard pop-up menu

1     Include the standard pop-up menu

Note:  This could be set by someone who wanted to define their own pop-up menu
       via the macro language, and omit the standard selections.

Note:  Pop-up menus are only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.

Related configuration constants:

INCLUDE_STD_MENUS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.64. INCLUDE_STD_MENUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set INCLUDE_STD_MENUS in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the default EPM
action bar is created.

The default value for INCLUDE_STD_MENUS is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit the action bar

1     Include the action bar

Note:  This would only be set by someone creating their own action bar via the
       macro language.

Related configuration constants:

INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT
INCLUDE_STANDARD_CONTEXT_MENU


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.65. INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the commands sent
from the IBM Workframe/2 should be defined in EPM.

The default value for INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Note:  Compiler support is only included if bookmark support is included.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.66. IPF_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set IPF_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing IPF files.

The default value for IPF_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for IPF files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever an IPF file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.67. I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT in MYCNF.E to specify that a
semicolon should be supplied after a DEFAULT statement when expanding a SWITCH
statement with C syntax assist active.

The default value for I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT is 0. Possible
values are:

0     Don't add a semicolon.

1     Add a line containing a semicolon after inserting the line containing the
      DEFAULT statement.

Related configuration constants:

C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
MY_EXPAND_ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.68. I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH in MYCNF.E to specify whether the CASE
statement should be aligned under the SWITCH when expanding a SWITCH statement
with C syntax assist active.

The default value for I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH is 1. Possible values
are:

0     Indent the CASE statement.

1     Align the CASE statement with the SWITCH statement.

Related configuration constants:

C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
MY_EXPAND_ON
SYNTAX_INDENT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.69. JAVA_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set JAVA_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing Java files.

The default value for JAVA_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for Java files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a Java file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.70. JAVA_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set JAVA_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for Java is
included whenever syntax assist for the C language is included.
(CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST should be turned on as well.)

The default value for JAVA_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
CPP_SYNTAX_ASSIST
MY_EXPAND_ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.71. KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN in MYCNF.E to specify whether the cursor should be
allowed to scroll off the visible portion of the edit window.

The default value for KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN is 1. Possible values are:

0     Conform to CUA, and don't change the line the cursor is on when scrolling
      with the scroll bars.  If the cursor is scrolled off the screen, then
      pressing any key that moves the cursor will cause the screen to jump so
      that the cursor is once again visible.

1     When scrolling with the scroll bars, keep the cursor at the same
      screen-relative position.

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.72. KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the index file(s)
used for providing keyword help.

The default value for KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE is 'epmkwhlp.ndx'. The value can
be a single filename or a list of filenames separated by plus signs.  For
example,

const
   KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE = 'epmkwhlp.ndx+epmtech.ndx+dde4.ndx'

Each file listed will be searched for in the current directory, EPMPATH, DPATH,
EPM.EXE's directory, and PATH (in that order).

Note:  The value compiled in will be overridden by the value of the environment
       variable HELPNDX if it is set in your environment.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_KEYWORD_HELP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.73. KEEP_TAGS_FILE_LOADED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set KEEP_TAGS_FILE_LOADED in MYCNF.E to specify whether the TAGS file should be
kept loaded after it is used.

The default value for KEEP_TAGS_FILE_LOADED is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't keep the TAGS file loaded; reload it every time the user attempts
      to use it.

1     Once the TAGS file is loaded, keep it as a hidden file for better
      performance if the user tries to find additional entries in the TAGS
      file.

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TAGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.74. LINK_HOST_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set LINK_HOST_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify that the support for editing host
files is to be linked separately. This can be used if there is no other way to
fit everything you need into your EPM.EX, but it is not recommended since the
separate file contains support for loading and saving workstation files as well
as host files; if you have a problem with the separate .ex file, you won't be
able to edit anything.

The default value for LINK_HOST_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:

0     Include host support in the base .ex file.

1     Include host support in a separate .ex file that will dynamically be
      linked at run time.  This is only supported for HOST_SUPPORT set to
      'EMUL' or 'SRPI'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.75. LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to include support for local mouse
definitions.  A local mouse definition is one that applies to a single file,
rather than to all files in the ring.  Since the default macros don't take
advantage of this, you would only set this to 1 if you were writing your own
mouse macros.  (See the description of register_mousehandler in EPMTECH.INF.)

The default value for LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit local mouse support.

1     Include local mouse support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.76. LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE in MYCNF.E to specify the style circle that should be
drawn around a string found by a Locate command or repeat_find operation, if
the HIGHLIGHT_COLOR configuration constant is set.

The default value for LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE is 1. Possible values are:

1     Draw a smooth circle or oval in a single color.

2     Draw an oval with the ends overlapping, in two colors.

3     Like 1, but wider

4     Like 2, but wider

5     Like 1, but a solid figure is drawn instead of just an outline.

Note:  Values above 2 can only be used in versions 5.60 and above.

See Also:

o LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 to select the color in which the circle is drawn.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.77. LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 in MYCNF.E to specify the circle color used when a
Locate or repeat_find is done, if the HIGHLIGHT_COLOR configuration constant is
set.  If a circle style that uses 2 colors is specified, then the constant
LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR2 will be used for the second color; the meaning of its
value is as described here. The color specified can be 0 through 15,
corresponding to the color constants defined in COLORS.E, or it can be an XOR
mask (indicated by adding 16,777,216 to the value of the desired mask).  If an
XOR mask is used, then the circle will be drawn by XORing the mask with the
contents of the screen.  An XOR mask is generally preferable, since the color
will automatically be adjusted according to the background - a specific color
might not show up if the background or mark color is the same color.  The
default value for LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 is 16777220, and for
LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR2 is 16777218.

Note:  This configuration constant is only used in versions 5.60 and above.

See Also:

o LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE to select the style circle drawn.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.78. LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the description of LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.79. LOG_TAG_MATCHES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set LOG_TAG_MATCHES in MYCNF.E to specify whether "hits" during a MAKETAGS
should be logged.  This flag is primarily intended for debugging purposes.

The default value for LOG_TAG_MATCHES is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't create a log file.

1     Create a log file, TAGS.LOG, and add entries to it for every "hit" gotten
      during a MAKETAGS operation.

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TAGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.80. MAINFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MAINFILE in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the macro file to be compiled by
the ETPM command if no argument is specified.

The default value for MAINFILE is 'epm.e'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.81. MARKCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MARKCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which marked (selected) text
should be displayed.

The default value for MARKCOLOR is Blue + GreyB.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Colors page of the Settings dialog.

Note:  Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.82. MENU_LIMIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MENU_LIMIT in MYCNF.E to include a Ring entry on the action bar that lists
each file in the edit ring.  The value of MENU_LIMIT is the number of files
that will be included in the Ring pulldown. If more than this many files are in
the ring, the (MENU_LIMIT + 1) entry will be More..., which will bring up a
listbox. One exception - if you set this to 0, there will be no Ring pulldown;
instead, a List ring entry will be added to the Options pulldown. This means
that adding files to or removing them from the ring will be faster.

The default value for MENU_LIMIT is 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.83. MESSAGECOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MESSAGECOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color for the message line, and for
error messages displayed when the message line is hidden.

The default value for MESSAGECOLOR is Light_Red + WhiteB.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Colors page of the Settings dialog.

Note:  Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.84. MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which marked text
should be displayed in a modified file when SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
'COLOR'.

The default value for MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR is Blue + WhiteB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.85. MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which unmarked text
should be displayed in a modified file when SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
'COLOR'.

The default value for MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR is White + BlueB. Possible values
are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.86. MOUSE_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MOUSE_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not mouse support should be
included in the base .ex file.

The default value for MOUSE_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit mouse support completely.

1     Include mouse support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).

'LINK' Dynamically link MOUSE.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX is
      1, then MOUSE.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.87. MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MVS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for editing files on an MVS host
should be included; this only applies when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for MVS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit MVS support.

1     Include MVS support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.88. MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the dictionary
addenda file to be used when spell checking a file.

The default value for MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME is 'c:\lexam\lexam.adl'.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Paths page of the Settings dialog.

Related configuration constants:

SPELL_SUPPORT
ADDENDASUPPORT
CHECK_FOR_LEXAM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.89. MY_APPNAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_APPNAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the application in the EPM.INI
file (or LAM.INI for LaMail) under which configuration information will be
saved.

The default value for MY_APPNAME is the first 3 characters of the .ex search
path name (i.e., 'EPM' for EPM and 'LAM' for LaMail).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.90. MY_BINOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_BINOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify the default file transfer options that
should be used when loading or saving host binary files if HOST_SUPPORT is set
to 'EMUL'. If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then
HOSTCOPYOPTIONS is used instead.

The default value for MY_BINOPTIONS is dependant on the value for USING; see
E3EMUL.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.91. MY_CENTER_SEARCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_CENTER_SEARCH in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the predefined
universal variable CENTER_SEARCH, which controls the position of the cursor
after a successful Locate or repeat_find (Ctrl+F) operation.

The default value for MY_CENTER_SEARCH is 1. Possible values are:

0     Cursor moves to target string; if target is before or after the text in
      the window, the cursor moves to the first or last line of the edit window
      (respectively).

1     Cursor moves to target string if it is visible in the edit window; target
      string is centered vertically in the edit window if it was found outside
      the window.

2     Target string is always centered vertically in the edit window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.92. MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the
CUA_marking_switch flag when WANT_CUA_MARKING is set to 'SWITCH'.

The default value for MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH is 0. Possible values are:

0     Start out in Advanced Marking mode.

1     Start out in the more limited CUA-compatible mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.93. MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the
CUA_menu_accel flag when BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS is set to 'SWITCH'.

The default value for MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL is 0. Possible values are:

0     Start out with the CUA accelerators blocked, so the EPM-defined actions
      will be performed.

1     Start out with the CUA accelerator definitions in effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.94. MY_CURSORDIMENSIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_CURSORDIMENSIONS in MYCNF.E to specify the initial dimensions of the
cursor when DYNAMIC_CURSOR_STYLE is set to 1.

The default value for MY_CURSORDIMENSIONS is '-128.3 -128.-64' if
UNDERLINE_CURSOR is set to 1, otherwise the default is '-128.-128 2.-128'.  The
value is width.height for replace mode, followed by width.height for insert
mode.  Each width and height value can be a positive number, representing the
number of pixels wide or high the cursor should be, or a negative number, whose
absolute value represents the number of 128ths of the character width or height
the cursor should be.  So, '2.-128' would represent a cursor 2 pixels wide and
the same height as the current character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.95. MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
the Edit command. These default options can be overridden by options given with
any particular edit command.  For example, if you normally don't want tabs to
be expanded to spaces when loading a file, you could include in your MYCNF.E:

const
   my_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS = '/t'
If you then did want to expand tabs for one file, you could enter the command:

e /nt myfile

The default value for MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS is the null string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.96. MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
the Save command. These default options can be overridden by options given with
any particular save command.  For example, if you normally want trailing spaces
to be stripped off when saving a file, you could include in your MYCNF.E:

const
   my_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS = '/s'
If you then did want to strip spaces for one file, you could enter the command:

s /nt myfile

The default value for MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS is the null string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.97. MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
the Locate and Change commands. These default options can be overridden by
options given with any particular locate or changecommand.  For example, if you
normally want searches to be case insensitive, you could include in your
MYCNF.E:

const
   my_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS = 'c'
If you then wanted to find a string where case mattered, you could enter the
command:

l /BiCapital/ e

The default value for MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS is the null string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.98. MY_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE in MYCNF.E to specify a file which will be included
in STDCTRL.E as part of the LoadDefaultToolbar command, to define the built-in
toolbar.  If a filename is specified, it should only contain a series of
buildsubmenu commands similar to those in the LoadDefaultToolbar command (and,
optionally, comments).  For example, MYCNF.E might contain:

const
   my_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE = 'my_tlbar.e'
and the MY_TLBAR.E file could contain:

   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  1, "#Msgs#1100#a_Messages##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  2, '', '', 16401, 0  -- MIS_SPACER
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  3, "#Add New#1101#a_Add_New##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  4, "#Open#1102#a_Open_empty##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  5, "#NewWind#1103#a_NewWindow##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  6, "#Settings#1104#a_Settings##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  7, "#Shell#1109#a_Shell##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  8, '', '', 16401, 0  -- MIS_SPACER
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu,  9, "#KwdHilit#1126#a_togl_hilit##sampactn", '', 0, 0
   buildsubmenu activeucmenu, 10, "#MonoFont#1106#a_MonoFont##sampactn", '', 0, 0

The default value for MY_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE is that it is not defined, which
causes the menu definitions in STDMENU.E to be used.

Note:  The toolbar is only available in version 6.00 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TINY_ICONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.99. MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the dictionary
file to be used when spell checking a file.

The default value for MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME is 'c:\lexam\us.dct'. You can list
multiple dictionaries, separated by spaces.

const
   my_DICTIONARY_FILENAME = 'us.dct legal.dct medical.dct'

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Paths page of the Settings dialog.

Related configuration constants:

SPELL_SUPPORT
CHECK_FOR_LEXAM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.100. MY_EXPAND_ON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_EXPAND_ON in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the EXPAND_ON flag
which determines whether syntax expansion will be performed automatically.

The default value for EXPAND_ON is 1. It can be changed at run time by use of
the EXPAND command. Possible values are:

0     Don't automatically provide syntax assist.

1     Expand all known keywords automatically.

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.101. MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name used for the extra .ex file
linked when EXTRA_EX is 1. This can be useful when you want to create multiple
sets of .ex files and want to avoid naming conflicts.  For example, LaMail uses
'LAMEXTRA'.

The default value for MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME is 'EXTRA'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.102. MY_FTOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_FTOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify the default file transfer options that
should be used when loading or saving host text files if HOST_SUPPORT is set to
'EMUL'. If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then HOSTCOPYOPTIONS
is used instead.

The default value for MY_FTOPTIONS is dependant on the value for USING; see
E3EMUL.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.103. MY_HOSTCMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_HOSTCMD in MYCNF.E to specify the method to be used for sending commands
to the host if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. This is meant for use by
user-written applications; it is not used by the distributed macros.

The default value for MY_HOSTCMD is dependant on the value for USING; see
E3EMUL.E. If USING is set to 'IBM', then the default is 'EHLLAPI', which uses
the included EHLLAPI support to write to the host screen. All other methods
require an external program, which is not included with the EPM package.

Related configuration constants:

USE_EHLLAPI


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.104. MY_HOSTCOPY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_HOSTCOPY in MYCNF.E to specify the command used for copying files
between the host and the workstation.

The default value for MY_HOSTCOPY is 'almcopy'

Related configuration constants:

HOST_SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.105. MY_HOSTDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_HOSTDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify what drive letter should be used to
represent the host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for my_HOSTDRIVE is 'H'. (Note:  No trailing colon is
allowed.) Users who have a real H: drive on their machine might want to set it
to some other value - for example, 'V' to represent VM files.

Related configuration constants:

HOSTDRIVE (for SAVELOAD.E users)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.106. MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP in MYCNF.E to specify whether text that wraps from one
line should be joined with the following line.  See Join After Wrap for an
example.

The default value for MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP is 1. Possible values are:

0     Join the wrapped text with the next line.

1     Place the wrapped text on its own line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.107. MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES in MYCNF.E to specify if temporary files should be saved
after editing is completed when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.  (Host file
editing is done by copying the host file to a temporary file on the
workstation, and then loading that file into the editor.)

The default value for MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES is 0. Possible values are:

0     Erase temporary files after successfully loading or saving the host file

1     Preserve the temporary files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.108. MY_LT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_LT in MYCNF.E to specify the default logical terminal to be used for
loading or saving host files when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for MY_LT is 'A'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.109. MY_MATCHTAB_ON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_MATCHTAB_ON in MYCNF.E to set the initial value used for MATCHTAB.

The default value for MY_MATCHTAB_ON is 0. Possible values are:

0     Start with MATCHTAB off.

1     Start with MATCHTAB on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.110. MY_MENU_PROMPT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_MENU_PROMPT in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for menu prompting
if WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS is set to 1.

The default value for MY_MENU_PROMPT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Start out without dynamic prompts.

1     Start out with dynamic prompts.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
       the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.111. MY_MOUSE_POINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_MOUSE_POINTER in MYCNF.E to choose the default mouse pointer style when
EPM_POINTER is set to 'switch'.

The default value for MY_MOUSE_POINTER is TEXT_POINTER, or 2.  Possible values
are listed in STDCONST.E; see the _POINTER constants.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.112. MY_MOUSESTYLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_MOUSESTYLE in MYCNF.E to choose the default mouse behavior in Advanced
Marking mode.

The default value for MY_MOUSESTYLE is 1. Possible values are:

1     Drag button 1 for block mark, Ctrl+MB1 for character mark.

2     Drag button 1 for character mark, Ctrl+MB1 for block mark.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_CUA_MARKING


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.113. MY_PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_PRINTER in MYCNF.E to specify the device ('LPT1', 'COM1', etc.) to be
used for the default printer. This can also be a LAN printer (e.g.,
'\\server\printq') The default printer is used when the Print command is given
without specifying an argument, or (if ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT is 0,) when Print
is selected from the File or Edit menu.

If no value for MY_PRINTER is set, then the device associated with the printer
listed in OS2SYS.INI under application PM_SPOOLER, key PRINTER will be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.114. MY_REXX_PROFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_REXX_PROFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether a Rexx profile will be called
if WANT_PROFILE is set to 'SWITCH'.

The default value for MY_REXX_PROFILE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't call PROFILE.ERX.

1     Call PROFILE.ERX.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
       the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options The Profile
       command can be used to change this dynamically in order to save a new value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.115. MY_RING_ENABLED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_RING_ENABLED in MYCNF.E to specify whether the ring (support of multiple
files) will be turned on or off at startup if RING_OPTIONAL is set to 1.

The default value for MY_RING_ENABLED is 1. Possible values are:

0     Start out with the ring disabled.

1     Start out with the ring enabled.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
       the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.116. MY_SAVEPATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_SAVEPATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory to which intermediate files
should be written when transferring files between the host and the workstation
if HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'.

If no value for MY_SAVEPATH is given, the SAVEPATH defaults to the
AUTOSAVE_PATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.117. MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS in MYCNF.E to specify that the /t option should always be
given when saving a file. This is equivalent to setting my_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS
to '/t'.

The default value for MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't save with tabs

1     Always convert multiple spaces to tabs when saving.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.118. MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE in MYCNF.E to specify one or more additional filetypes
(extensions) which will be considered to be SCRIPT files when spell checking
the file. When spell checking a SCRIPT file, then SCRIPT variables and markup
are checked for and ignored.  The file types normally considered SCRIPT files
are 'SCR', 'SCT', 'SCRIPT', and 'IPF'.

The default value for MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE is that it is not set.

Note:  In versions of EPM prior to 5.50, only one filetype could be specified.
       In 5.50 and above, any number can be given, separated by spaces.  For
       example:

              my_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE = 'TXT IPFC DOC'

Related configuration constants:

SPELL_SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.119. MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the
SHOW_LONGNAMES flag when WANT_LONGNAMES is set to 'SWITCH'.

The default value for MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't display the .LONGNAME extended attribute.

1     Display the .LONGNAME on the title bar.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
       the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options The Longnames
       command can be used to change this dynamically in order to save a new value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.120. MY_STAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_STAY in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the STAY flag when SETSTAY
is set to '?'.

The default value for MY_STAY is 0. Possible values are:

0     After a Change, leave the cursor on the last changed string.

1     After a Change, preserve the original position of the cursor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.121. MY_STREAM_MODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_STREAM_MODE in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the STREAM_MODE flag
when WANT_STREAM_MODE is set to 'SWITCH'.

The default value for MY_STREAM_MODE is 1 if ENTER_ACTION is set to 'STREAM',
or 0 otherwise. Possible values are:

0     Start out in line mode.

1     Start out in stream mode.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
       the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.122. MY_TWO_SPACES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set MY_TWO_SPACES in MYCNF.E to initialize the TWO_SPACES universal variable,
which controls whether one or two spaces are left after a period, question
mark, exclamation point or colon when reflowing text.

The default value for MY_TWO_SPACES is 1. Possible values are:

0     Leave only one space.

1     Leave two spaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.123. NLS_LANGUAGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set NLS_LANGUAGE in MYCNF.E to

The default value for NLS_LANGUAGE is 'english'. The following languages are
available separately in the EPMMRI package:

'DANSK'
'DEUTSCH'
'ESPANOL'
'FRANCAIS'
'ITALIANO'
'NL'
'NORSK'
'PORTUGAL'
'SUOMI'
'SV'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.124. NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS in MYCNF.E to disallow duplicate bookmark names.
Duplicate bookmarks are useful if you want to access them using the Next and
Previous Bookmark operations rather than by name, and so don't want to bother
giving them unique names.  This can be confusing to some people, however,
because although all the names will be listed in the bookmark list, selecting
any of them will go to the same place in the file.  Also, deleting any of the
bookmarks with a given name from the list will result in none of them being
listed (although they will still be able to be accessed by Next and Previous).

The default value for NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Allow duplicate bookmarks.

1     Don't allow duplicate bookmarks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.125. NO_ESCAPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set NO_ESCAPE in MYCNF.E to prevent the Escape key from activating the command
line dialog.

The default value for NO_ESCAPE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Escape key will activate command dialog.

1     Only Ctrl+I will activate the command dialog.

Related configuration constants:

TOGGLE_ESCAPE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.126. PERL_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set PERL_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing Perl files.

The default value for PERL_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for Perl files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a Perl file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.127. PROCESSNAME_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set PROCESSNAME_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command executed after mouse
button 2 is double-clicked on the title bar and the user presses Enter.

The default value for PROCESSNAME_CMD is 'name'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.128. PROOF_CIRCLE_STYLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set PROOF_CIRCLE_STYLE in MYCNF.E to specify the style circle that should be
drawn around the word currently being checked by the PROOF command.  The
default value is 2; the possible values are as described for the
LOCATE_CIRCLE_STYLE configuration constant.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.129. PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR1 in MYCNF.E to specify the circle color used by the
PROOF command.  The default values are PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR1 = 16777220 and
PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR2 = 16777218; the possible values are as described for the
LOCATE_CIRCLE_COLOR1 configuration constant (and the same version limitation
applies - only used in 5.60 or above).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.130. PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the description of PROOF_CIRCLE_COLOR1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.131. PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED in MYCNF.E to specify that the Proof dialog always
appear in a fixed location.

The default value for PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED is 0. Possible values are:

0     The Proof dialog will appear under the word being proofed.

1     The Proof dialog will appear to the right of the edit window.

Note:  This specifies where EPMLEX.E asks to have the proof dialog placed; if
       this would result in part of the dialog being off the screen, the dialog
       will automatically be shifted appropriately. This might result in the
       dialog covering the word being proofed.

Note:  This only applies to versions of EPM prior to 5.60; later versions use a
       custom dialog which remembers where it was last placed rather than a
       standard listbox.

Related configuration constants:

SPELL_SUPPORT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.132. P_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set P_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when editing
Pascal files if P_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.

The default value for P_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
than the maximum length of a line.  (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
special margins should be set for Pascal files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.133. P_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set P_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the Pascal
language is included.

The default value for P_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
P_MARGINS
P_SYNTAX_INDENT
P_TABS
MY_EXPAND_ON
TERMINATE_COMMENTS
WANT_END_COMMENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.134. P_SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set P_SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
indented when using syntax assist for Pascal files.

The default value for P_SYNTAX_INDENT is SYNTAX_INDENT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.135. P_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set P_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for Pascal files.

The default value for P_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for Pascal files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.136. RC_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RC_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing RC files.

The default value for RC_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for RC files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever an RC file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.137. RECEIVE_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RECEIVE_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command to be used to receive a file
from the host when HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL' and USING is 'CP78'.

The default value for RECEIVE_CMD is 'receive'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.138. REFLOW_LIKE_PE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REFLOW_LIKE_PE in MYCNF.E to specify whether paragraph reflow should leave
the cursor where it is or move the cursor to the next paragraph on completion.

The default value for REFLOW_LIKE_PE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Leave the cursor where it is after a paragraph reflow.

1     Move the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph after a paragraph
      reflow.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.139. RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA in MYCNF.E to specify whether words added to the
addenda dictionary should have their case preserved.

The default value for RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA is 1. Possible values are:

0     Translate all words to lower case before adding them to the addenda.

1     Add words as they appeared in the document.

Related configuration constants:

SPELL_SUPPORT
ADDENDASUPPORT
CHECK_FOR_LEXAM


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.140. RESPECT_SCROLL_LOCK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RESPECT_SCROLL_LOCK in MYCNF.E to specify whether you want the cursor
movement keys to scroll the current file's text rather than move the cursor
when Scroll Lock mode is on.

The default value for RESPECT_SCROLL_LOCK is 0. Possible values are:

0     Ignore the Scroll Lock state.

1     Make the Up, Down, Left and Right arrow keys scroll the contents of the
      edit window when Scroll Lock mode is on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.141. RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT in MYCNF.E to specify whther the mark should be
restored after sorting.

The default value for RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT is 1. Possible values are:

0     Leave the sorted text unmarked.

1     Restore the mark after sorting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.142. REXX_EXTENSIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_EXTENSIONS in MYCNF.E to specify what extensions (or filetypes) should
be considered to be Rexx files for syntax expansion if REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST is
enabled.

The default value for REXX_EXTENSIONS is 'BAT CMD ERX EXC EXEC XEDIT REX REXX
VRX'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.143. REXX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing Rexx files.

The default value for REXX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for Rexx files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a Rexx file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.144. REXX_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when
editing Rexx files if REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.

The default value for REXX_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one
less than the maximum length of a line.  (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions
prior to 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that
no special margins should be set for Rexx files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.145. REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the Rexx
language is included.

The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
REXX_MARGINS
REXX_SYNTAX_INDENT
REXX_TABS
MY_EXPAND_ON
TERMINATE_COMMENTS
WANT_END_COMMENTED
REXX_SYNTAX_CASE
REXX_SYNTAX_FORCE_CASE
REXX_SYNTAX_NO_ELSE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.146. REXX_SYNTAX_CASE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_SYNTAX_CASE in MYCNF.E to control in what case Rexx keywords should be
entered during syntax assist.

The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_CASE is 'LOWER'. Possible values are:

'LOWER'   Enter keywords in lower case.

'MIXED'   Enter keywords in mixed case (initial capital letter followed by
          lower case).

Note:  'UPPER' is not a possible value, because it is considered poor style.
       All upper-case yields much less readable code.

Related configuration constants:

REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.147. REXX_SYNTAX_FORCE_CASE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_SYNTAX_FORCE_CASE in MYCNF.E to control whether the case of user-typed
keywords should be changed.

The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_FORCE_CASE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Leave user-typed keywords as entered.

1     Change user-typed keywords (for which syntax assist is enabled) to match
      the case specified by REXX_SYNTAX_CASE.

Related configuration constants:

REXX_SYNTAX_CASE
REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.148. REXX_SYNTAX_NO_ELSE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_SYNTAX_NO_ELSE in MYCNF.E to control whether an Else should be added
after an If statement during Rexx syntax assist.

The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_NO_ELSE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Provide the Else statement

1     Omit the Else statement

Related configuration constants:

REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.149. REXX_SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
indented when using syntax assist for Rexx files.

The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_INDENT is SYNTAX_INDENT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.150. REXX_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set REXX_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for Rexx files.

The default value for REXX_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting,
or set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for Rexx files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.151. RING_OPTIONAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RING_OPTIONAL in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not EPM should pretend to be
able to only edit a single file at a time.  Note that EPM can always edit
multiple files; this merely controls how easy it is to do so.

The default value for RING_OPTIONAL is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't hide the presence of the edit ring.

1     Allow the hiding of the ring.

Related configuration constants:

MY_RING_ENABLED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.152. RUNTIME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set RUNTIME in MYCNF.E to specify whether various commands should be defined
for changing variable values at runtime if HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL'.

The default value for RUNTIME is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit runtime support.

1     Include runtime support.

The runtime commands are:

EM    Change the emulator being used.

LT    Change the default logical terminal.

HD    Change the HOSTDRIVE drive letter.

SAVEPATH Change the directory being used for the SAVEPATH.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.153. SCRIPT_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SCRIPT_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing Script files.

The default value for SCRIPT_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for Script files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a Script file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.154. SEND_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SEND_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command to be used to send a file to the
host when HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL' and USING is 'CP78'.

The default value for SEND_CMD is 'send'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.155. SETSTAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SETSTAY in MYCNF.E to determine which is to be the current line after a
Change command.

The default value for SETSTAY is 0. Possible values are:

0     Cursor will be positioned on the last occurrence of the string in the
      file.

1     The original position of the cursor will not be changed.

'?'   A STAY command will be defined so you can change between the above two
      behaviors at run time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.156. SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY in MYCNF.E to control what is shifted by the Ctrl+F7 and
Ctrl+F8 keys.

The default value for SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY is 0. Possible values are:

0     Shift all text to the right of the left edge of the block, ignoring the
      right edge of the block

1     Shift only the contents of the block, truncating what is shifted past the
      right edge, and adding blanks at the right edge of the block when
      shifting to the left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.157. SHOW_EACH_PROCEDURE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SHOW_EACH_PROCEDURE in MYCNF.E to specify whether each found procedure
should be announced when a tags file is being built.

The default value for SHOW_EACH_PROCEDURE is 0. Possible values are:

0       Only announce the name of each source file being searched.

1       Announce the name of each procedure found in the source file(s) as the
        procedure is discovered.

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TAGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.158. SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD in MYCNF.E to specify what indication should be given
that the current file has been modified.

The default value for SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is ''. Possible values are:

''        Don't do anything special; the word "Modified" will appear on the
          status line when the file is modified if using the default
          STATUS_TEMPLATE.

'COLOR'   Indicate by changing the color of the text. Modified files will have
          unmarked text displayed in MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR instead of TEXTCOLOR,
          and marked text displayed in MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR instead of MARKCOLOR.

'TITLE'   Indicate by appending a string (default '(mod)') to the filename
          displayed on the title bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.159. SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT in MYCNF.E to specify the string that should be added to
the title bar when the file has been modified, if SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
'TITLE'.

The default value for SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT is ' (mod)'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.160. SMARTFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SMARTFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether the File key (F4) should just quit
if the file has not been modified.

The default value for SMARTFILE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Pressing F4 will always do a Save and Quit.

1     Pressing F4 if there were no changes made will only Quit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.161. SMARTSAVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SMARTSAVE in MYCNF.E to specify whether the user should be warned when
pressing the Save key (F2) in a file that hasn't had any changes made to it.

The default value for SMARTSAVE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Pressing F2 will always do a Save.

1     Pressing F2 if there were no changes made will give a message saying that
      the file has not been modified, and bring up the command line with a Save
      command in it.  The user can then press Enter to save the file anyway, or
      Esc to cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.162. SORT_BOOKMARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SORT_BOOKMARKS in MYCNF.E to specify that the list of bookmarks should be
sorted into alphabetical order.

The default value for SORT_BOOKMARKS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Present the list of bookmarks in the order in which they were added.

1     Present the list of bookmarks sorted into alphabetical order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.163. SORT_TYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SORT_TYPE in MYCNF.E to specify the type of sort command desired.

The default value for SORT_TYPE is 'EPM' in version 5.60 and above, or 'DLL' in
earlier versions. Possible values are:

''    Omit support for the Sort command.

'DLL' Define the Sort command to use a sort routine defined in a DLL; this is
      fast, but can sort up to a limit of 64k of data because the text to be
      sorted is passed in a buffer.

'E'   Define the Sort command to use a sort routine defined in the E language.
      This is slower than the DLL code, but has no size limit.

'EPM' Define the Sort command to use a sort routine defined in the E Toolkit.
      This is the fastest method and has no size limit; it is only available in
      version 5.60 and above.

XXX   (any other string)  Will attempt to include a user-written SortXXX.E
      file, which might call a user-supplied sort routine.  Samples are
      available that call various IBM Internal Use Only utilities.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.164. SPELL_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SPELL_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify if and how the spell checking support
should be included.

The default value for SPELL_SUPPORT is 'DYNALINK' Possible values are:

0           Omit spell-checking support.

1           Include support in the base .ex file.

'LINK'      Link the separately-compiled EPMLEX.EX file automatically at
            startup time.

'DYNALINK'  Link the separately-compiled EPMLEX.EX file automatically the first
            time the user attempts to do a spell check.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.165. STATUSCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set STATUSCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify in what color the status line should be
displayed.

The default value for STATUSCOLOR is Black + WhiteB.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Colors page of the Settings dialog.

Note:  Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.166. STATUS_TEMPLATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set STATUS_TEMPLATE in MYCNF.E to specify what should be displayed on the EPM
status line. The template is a character string of up to 128 characters. The
string can contain an assortment of characters and status tags. These tags
instruct EPM what to insert into the final status line string.

A status tag consists of two characters; '%' followed by a legal status item
character. Defined status tags are as follows:

%A   Autosave count value (number of changes made to the file since the last
     autosave)
%C   current Column number
%F   number of Files in ring (followed by the word "File" or "Files")
%I   Insert or replace state (cursor status)
%L   current Line number
%M   Modified status (if the file has been modified)
%S   total number of lines in the current file
%X   displays the hexadecimal value of the current character
%Z   displays the ASCII value of the current character

The default value if STATUS_TEMPLATE is not defined is 'Line %l of %s  Column
%c  %i  %m  %f'

Note:  Previous versions of EPM used a .STATUSLINE field which allowed macro
       writers to set a different status line for each file in the ring.  This
       was wasteful, since space had to be allocated for the status line for
       every file.  Now, instead of a .STATUSLINE field, there is a global
       status line whose value is set using the SETSTATUSLINE command (defined
       in STDCTRL.E).  Users wishing to have a different status line depending
       on the file can call SETSTATUSLINE from a DEFSELECT.  See the EPM
       Technical Reference for details.

Examples: Example 1:

STATUS_TEMPLATE = 'L= %l, C= %c'

Given the above constant and your cursor on line 100, column 3.  The following
status line will be produced:

L= 100, C= 3
Example 2:

STATUS_TEMPLATE = 'Total Lines = %S Row %l Col %c  Char<%z> mode=%i'

Given the above constant, your cursor on line 100, column 3, your cursor is
below the letter 'A', and the cursor is in insert mode.  The following status
line will be produced:

Total Lines = 1015 Row 100 Col 3  Char<65> mode=Insert
Example 3:

STATUS_TEMPLATE = Line %l of %s   Col %c  %i   %m    Asc. %z=x'%x'   %f
If the cursor is on the digit 0, this will produce a status line like:

Line 1 of 1234   Col 13  Replace  Modified   Asc. 48=x'30'  5 Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.167. STD_MENU_NAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set STD_MENU_NAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the file used to build the
action bar menus.

The default for STD_MENU_NAME is that it is not set, which means that STDMENU.E
will be used.  Any filename can be specified in the case of user-supplied
menus.  (See the comments in OVSHMENU.E describing what a user-supplied menu
file must provide, if you want to write your own.) Supplied alternate menu
files are:

'fevshmnu.e' Provides a menu implementing the menu layout planned for the next
          release of OS/2, with pulldowns for File, Edit, View, Selected, and
          Help,

'ovshmenu.e' Provides a menu implementing the CUA-94 WOVSH menu layout, with
          pulldowns for File, View, Selected, and Help,

Note:  The provided alternate menus don't have equivalents for the Options /
       Preferences or Options / Frame Controls pull-rights on the standard
       menu, and so are not recommended for EPM versions prior to 6.00.  (6.00
       has a new Settings notebook which lets you configure those items in a
       different way.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.168. SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the Book icon entry
should appear on the Options menu.  This entry changes focus to the icon which
is present when EPM is started with the /I option.

The default value for SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit Book icon

1     Include Book icon

Historical note:  Originally, EPM had a book icon.  This had to be changed when
                  EPM went into OS/2 as the Enhanced Editor, but the name of
                  the configuration constant has remained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.169. SUPPORT_TECHREF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SUPPORT_TECHREF in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the View Technical
Reference entry should appear on the Help menu.

The default value for SUPPORT_TECHREF is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit View Technical Reference

1     Include a View Technical Reference selection that will call VIEW to look
      at the file EPMTECH.INF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.170. SUPPORT_USER_EXITS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SUPPORT_USER_EXITS in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not "hooks" for calling
user exits should be included. If included, the exits will be checked for and,
if present, called, at editor startup (where the command line arguments can be
examined and modified), when the name of the file being edited is changed,
before and after saving a file, and when quitting a file. For additional
information on the exits, including the paramaters passed, users should refer
to The EPM Editor Technical Reference.

The default value for SUPPORT_USER_EXITS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support for user exits.

1     Include support for user exits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.171. SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the View User's
Guide entry should appear on the Help menu.

The default value for SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit View User's Guide

1     Include a View User's Guide selection that will call VIEW to look at the
      file EPMUSERS.INF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.172. SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
indented when using syntax assist.

The default value for SYNTAX_INDENT is 3.

Related configuration constants:

ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
MY_EXPAND_ON


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.173. SYS_MONOSPACED_SIZE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the default System Monospaced font size.  This will affect the font
used when a DIR or similar command changes to a monospaced font in order to
ensure that columns line up, and also the base font selected if the
WANT_SYS_MONOSPACED constant is set.  The default value is 0, which means that
the system will provide a default value - the exact size used depends on the
display.  A specific value can be used, e.g.:

const
   SYS_MONOSPACED_SIZE = 'WW8HH16'  -- Want a 16x8 font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.174. TAGS_ANYWHERE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TAGS_ANYWHERE in MYCNF.E to specify whether C and E language procedure
definitions should be searched for anywhere in the source files, or only
starting in column 1, during a MAKETAGS operation. The search will be slightly
faster if limited to searching for procedures starting in column 1, with no
leading comments or whitespace, but this option should only be selected if
you're sure that all routines in the files you're searching are defined that
way.

The default value for TAGS_ANYWHERE is 1. Possible values are:

0     Only search for procedures starting in column 1.

1     Allow procedure definitions to occur anywhere in the line.

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TAGS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.175. TEMP_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TEMP_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the (fully-qualified) name of a
temporary file that will be used for various commands. This should point to the
fastest drive you have (a VDISK is ideal). If no drive or directory is
specified, and a temporary path is set in the Paths page of the Settings
dialog, then that path will be attached to the file name.

The default value for TEMP_FILENAME is 'e.tmp'.

Note:  This constant is used to initialize a universal variable that is used
       wherever a single temporary file is needed. The universal variable can
       be modified at run time if desired. MYSTUFF.SMP (in the standard set of
       E_MACROS) contains sample code that sets the variable according to the
       value of an environment variable which points to a VDISK.

Related configuration constants:

TEMP_PATH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.176. TEMP_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TEMP_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the path where temporary files should be
placed. This should point to the fastest drive you have (a VDISK is ideal).  If
a value is given, a trailing backslash must be supplied.

The default value for TEMP_PATH is '' (the current directory).

Note:  This constant is used to initialize a universal variable that is used
       wherever more than one temporary file is needed. The universal variable
       can be modified at run time if desired. MYSTUFF.SMP (in the standard set
       of E_MACROS) contains sample code that sets the variable according to
       the value of an environment variable which points to a VDISK.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Paths page of the Settings dialog.

Related configuration constants:

TEMP_FILENAME


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.177. TERMINATE_COMMENTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TERMINATE_COMMENTS in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not open comments
should automatically be terminated when the syntax assist trigger (Enter or
Ctrl+Enter) is pressed.

The default value for TERMINATE_COMMENTS is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't terminate comments.

1     Terminate open comments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.178. TEX_FILETYPES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TEX_FILETYPES in MYCNF.E to specify what file types (extensions) should be
assumed to be TeX files when spell-checking.

The default value for TEX_FILETYPES is 'TEX'.  Additional types can be added to
the string, separated by spaces.  E.g.,

const
   TEX_FILETYPES = 'TEX LTX'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.179. TEX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TEX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING in MYCNF.E to to specify whether keyword
highlighting should automatically be on when editing Tex files.

The default value for TEX_KEYWORD_HIGHLIGHTING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't turn on keyword highlighting for Tex files.

1     Turn on keyword highlighting whenever a Tex file is loaded.

Note:  Keyword highlighting is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.180. TEXTCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TEXTCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which unmarked text in the
edit window should be displayed.

The default value for TEXTCOLOR is Black + WhiteB.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
       Colors page of the Settings dialog.

Note:  Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.181. TOGGLE_ESCAPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TOGGLE_ESCAPE in MYCNF.E to specify whether an ESCAPEKEY command should be
defined.

The default value for TOGGLE_ESCAPE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit ESCAPEKEY

1     Define ESCAPEKEY

Related configuration constants:

NO_ESCAPE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.182. TOGGLE_TAB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TOGGLE_TAB in MYCNF.E to specify whether a TABKEY command is defined.

The default value for TOGGLE_TAB is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit TABKEY

1     Define the TABKEY command


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.183. TOP_OF_FILE_VALID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TOP_OF_FILE_VALID in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the user should be
allowed to position the cursor on line 0 (the Top of File line).

The default value for TOP_OF_FILE_VALID is 1. Possible values are:

0     Don't allow the cursor on line 0.

1     Allow the cursor on line 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.184. TRASH_TEMP_FILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set TRASH_TEMP_FILES in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not temporary files
should be allowed to be quit without warning the user.  (A file whose filename
begins with a period, like '.DIR', is assumed to be a temporary file.)

The default value for TRASH_TEMP_FILES is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't treat temporary files any differently.

1     When quitting a temporary file, don't present the Quitting file dialog if
      the file was modified; just throw away the changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.185. UNDERLINE_CURSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set UNDERLINE_CURSOR in MYCNF.E to specify that you want the AVIO-style
underline cursor rather than the GPI-style vertical bar.

The default value for UNDERLINE_CURSOR is 0. Possible values are:

0     Insert-mode cursor is a vertical bar to the left of the current
      character; replace-mode cursor is a block the height and width of the
      current character.

1     Replace-mode cursor is a horizontal line below the baseline of the
      current character; insert-mode cursor is a block the width and half the
      height of the current character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.186. UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE in MYCNF.E to specify that an unmark operation should be
performed after a mark is moved with the Alt+M key or via the Edit menu.

The default value for UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Leave the mark, so the marked text can be copied or moved again.

1     Remove the mark, so a new mark can be started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.187. USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION in MYCNF.E to control how the template for MAIN is
created using the C syntax assist.

The default value for USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION is 1. Possible values are:

0     the declarations for argc, argv and envp will be entered as separate
      statements.

1     the declarations will be included as part of the function's argument
      list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.188. USE_APPEND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set USE_APPEND in MYCNF.E to specify that files passed to the edit command
without a path should be searched for along the DPATH if not found in the
current directory.  (This gives an effect similar to the DOS APPEND command.)

The default value for USE_APPEND is 0. Possible values are:

0     Use filenames as given.

1     If an unqualified filename is given and it is not found in the current
      directory, check the DPATH for it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.189. USE_EHLLAPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set USE_EHLLAPI in MYCNF.E to specify whether Send and Receive should be called
directly to transfer files between the workstation and the host, or whether
they should be called via EHLLAPI. Communication Manager's Send & Receive don't
work from inside a PM program, so we call them via EHLLAPI. The FTTERM and
PMFTERM versions do work (and EHLLAPI does not), so we let the user override
the default.

The default value for USE_EHLLAPI is 1. Possible values are:

0     Call Send and Receive directly.

1     Use EHLLAPI calls to invoke Send and Receive.

Note:  This is only relevant if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL' and USING is set
       to 'IBM'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.190. USING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set USING in MYCNF.E to specify the file transfer protocol to be used when
HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for USING is 'IBM'. Possible values are:

'CM'      Communications Manager, using ALMCOPY (unless MY_HOSTCOPY is used to
          specify a different host copy command).

'CP78'    CP78 (the CUT-mode emulator)

'CM+CP78' Both of the above, when using multiple 3270 adapters.  HA:, HB:, etc.
          will go to CM on adapter 1; H2: will go to CP78 on adapter 2.

'IBM'     Send / Receive protocol, as used by CM, FTTERM, PMFTERM, etc.

'CM+IBM'  Acts like 'CM' for VM files, 'IBM' for MVS files.

Related configuration constants:

USE_EHLLAPI
MY_HOSTCOPY


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.191. VALID_LTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set VALID_LTS in MYCNF.E to specify what characters will be considered as
representing valid logical terminals when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for VALID_LTS is dependant on the value for USING; see
E3EMUL.E.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.192. VANILLA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set VANILLA in MYCNF.E to omit all other MY*.E files when compiling.  This can
be useful when debugging problems, to determine whether the problem is with the
base set of macros (as configured by your MYCNF.E) or with user-written code in
other MY*.E files.

The default value for VANILLA is 0. Possible values are:

0     Include all the normal MY*.E files.

1     Compile a "vanilla" .ex file, omitting all user-written code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.193. VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set VM in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be included for editing
files on a VM host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.

The default value for VM is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support for VM files.

1     Include support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.194. WANT_ALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_ALL in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the ALL command should be
included in the base .ex file.

The default value for WANT_ALL is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit ALL command.

1     Include ALL command.

Note:  ALL can be compiled and used separately; it need not be included in the
       base .ex file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.195. WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for
accessing the application .ini file (e.g., EPM.INI) is included.  People
building an E Toolkit application using the base EPM macros might want to set
this to 0; EPM users should leave it as 1.

The default value for WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.196. WANT_BITMAP_BACKGROUND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_BITMAP_BACKGROUND in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the Watson
Works bitmap background should be present.

The default value for WANT_BITMAP_BACKGROUND is 1. Possible values are:

0       A plain background should be used.

1       The Watson Works bitmap should be used as a background.

Note:  The Watson Works bitmap background is only available in version 5.60 or
       above.  Use of other background bitmaps (via drag & drop) is only
       supported for version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.197. WANT_BOOKMARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_BOOKMARKS in MYCNF.E to specify whether bookmark support should be
included.

The default value for WANT_BOOKMARKS is 'LINK' Possible values are:

0       Omit bookmark support

1       Include bookmark support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).

'LINK'  Dynamically link BOOKMARK.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX
        is 1, then BOOKMARK.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).

Note:  BOOKMARK.E includes support for bookmarks, for IBM's Workframe/2
       product, and for loading and saving attributes in an Extended Attribute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.198. WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT in MYCNF.E to specify whether braces should
appear on the same line as the statement or on the following line during syntax
assist expansion.

The default value for WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT is 0. Possible values are:

0     The brace will appear to the right of the statement.

            if () {
            } else {
            } /* endif */

1     The brace will appear below the statement.

            if ()
            {
            }
            else
            {
            } /* endif */

Related configuration constants:

WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
WANT_END_COMMENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.199. WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED in MYCNF.E to specify whether the
braces below the statement should be indented from the statement during syntax
assist expansion.  This flag only applies when WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT is
also set.

The default value for WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT_INDENTED is 0. Possible values
are:

0     The brace will appear directly below the statement.

1     The brace will appear below and to the right of the statement.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT
C_SYNTAX_INDENT
SYNTAX_INDENT
C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
WANT_END_COMMENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.200. WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING in MYCNF.E to specify whether the bracket-matching
code in ASSIST.E should be included.

The default value for WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support; pressing Ctrl+[ will move the cursor to the matching
      parenthesis ('()'), bracket ('[]'), brace ('{}'), or angle bracket('<>').


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.201. WANT_CHAR_OPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_CHAR_OPS in MYCNF.E to omit support for character marking, if you're
trying to save space.

The default value for WANT_CHAR_OPS is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.

Related configuration constants:

WORD_MARK_TYPE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.202. WANT_CUA_MARKING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_CUA_MARKING in MYCNF.E to specify whether you want CUA-style marking
or the more powerful EPM marking.

The default value for WANT_CUA_MARKING is 0. Possible values are:

0         Use the normal EPM marking ("Advanced marking").

1         Use the CUA-style marking.

'SWITCH'  Support both marking styles, and allow the user to change back and
          forth between them (via an entry on the Preferences selection of the
          Options menu).

Related configuration constants:

MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.203. WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the macros should include
support for Double Byte Character Sets.

The default value for WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit DBCS support.

1     Include DBCS support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.204. WANT_DM_BUFFER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_DM_BUFFER in MYCNF.E to specify whether all deleted marks should be
saved in a buffer for later recovery

The default value for WANT_DM_BUFFER is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support

1     Include support; a Recover mark delete entry will appear on the Edit
      menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.205. WANT_DOSUTIL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_DOSUTIL in MYCNF.E to omit DOSUTIL.E if you are tight on space. The
commands affected include QDATE, QTIME, DIR, SET, VOL, PATH, DPATH and OS2.

The default value for WANT_DOSUTIL is '?'. Possible values are:

0     Omit DOSUTIL.E.

1     Include DOSUTIL.E.

'?'   Include DOSUTIL.E if found; don't warn the user if it's not.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.206. WANT_DRAW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_DRAW in MYCNF.E to omit support for the DRAW command.

The default value for WANT_DRAW is 'F6' Possible values are:

0     Omit support for the DRAW command.

1     Include support for the DRAW command.

'F6'  Include support for the DRAW command, and define F6 to invoke it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.207. WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for dynamic menu
prompting is included. This refers to the display of a prompt on the message
line whenever a menu item is selected, describing what that menu item does. If
support is included, the presentation of the prompts can be toggled on or off
dynamically (via a Prompting entry on the Frame Controls pull-right menu of the
Options menu).

The default value for WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.

Related configuration constants:

MY_MENU_PROMPT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.208. WANT_EBOOKIE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_EBOOKIE in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for EBOOKIE should be
included.

The default value for WANT_EBOOKIE is 'DYNALINK'. Possible values are:

0           Omit support.

1           Include BKEYS.E in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is set to 1).

'LINK'      always link BKEYS.EX at startup.

'DYNALINK'  Include support for EBOOKIE in the base macros, but don't try to
            link BKEYS.EX.  EBOOKIE support will be activated when BKEYS is
            linked, either explicitly (LINK BKEYS) or implicitly (BOOKIE ON).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.209. WANT_END_COMMENTED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_END_COMMENTED in MYCNF.E to specify whether a comment should be added
to the end of a block or statement in syntax assist, indicating what is being
ended.

The default value for WANT_END_BRACE_COMMENTED is 1. Possible values are:

0         Don't add a comment to the ending braces.

1         Add a comment in the form "/* endif */".

'//'      Add a comment (to C or C++ files) in the form "// endif". For Pascal
          or Rexx, acts like 1.

Related configuration constants:

C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.210. WANT_EPM_SHELL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_EPM_SHELL in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be included for
the EPM shell window.

The default value for WANT_EPM_SHELL is 0. Possible values are:

0         Omit support.

1         Include support.

'HIDDEN'  Include support, but hide it from the Command menu until the first
          time the user enters a Shell command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.211. WANT_ET_COMMAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_ET_COMMAND in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for the ETPM command
should be included.

The default value for WANT_ET_COMMAND is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.212. WANT_GET_ENV ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_GET_ENV in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Get_env() routine should be
defined in DOSUTIL.E.  The routine will be defined if either WANT_GET_ENV or
USE_APPEND are set to 1. The EPATH and OPATH commands will only be defined if
both the Get_Env() and Search_path() routines are defined. You can also set
WANT_GET_ENV to 1 if you want to call Get_Env() from your own routines.

The default value for WANT_GET_ENV is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit the routine.

1     Include the routine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.213. WANT_KEYWORD_HELP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_KEYWORD_HELP in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for getting help
for a keyword is included.

The default value for WANT_KEYWORD_HELP is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.

Related configuration constants:

KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.214. WANT_LAN_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_LAN_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the LOCK and UNLOCK commands
are defined.

The default value for WANT_LAN_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit support.

1     Include support.

Note:  In previous versions, the file locking support was done completely in
       the macros.  Starting with EPM version 5.51, we have internal support
       for file locking.  Therefore, files can be locked using the Edit /k
       option regardless of the setting of WANT_LAN_SUPPORT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.215. WANT_LONGNAMES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_LONGNAMES in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for long names should
be included. See the Longnames command for a description of what this does.

The default value for WANT_LONGNAMES is 0. Possible values are:

0         Omit support.

1         Include support.

'SWITCH'  Include support, and define a Longnames command to let you turn it on
          and off at runtime.

Related configuration constants:

MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.216. WANT_MATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_MATH in MYCNF.E to optionally omit MATH.E if space is needed. The
commands affected are MATH, MATHX, MATHO, ADD, and MULT.

The default value for WANT_MATH is '?'. Possible values are:

0     Omit MATH.E.

1     Include MATH.E.

'?'   Include MATH.E if found; don't warn the user if it's not.

Related configuration constants:

INCLUDE_MATHLIB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.217. WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Preferences and
Frame Controls pull-right menus under the Options menu will be dismissed as
soon as something is selected, or whether they should stay up until explicitly
dismissed.

The default value for WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS is 1. Possible values are:

0     The above-mentioned menus will disappear as soon as anything is selected

1     The above-mentioned menus will remain active as long as only selections
      that can have check marks are toggled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.218. WANT_PROFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_PROFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether a PROFILE.ERX should be called
if one exists.

The default value for WANT_PROFILE is 0. Possible values are:

0         Don't check for a Rexx profile.

1         Check for a Rexx profile whenever a new edit window is created, and
          execute it if found.

'SWITCH'  Define a Profile command to allow turning this on and off
          dynamically.

Related configuration constants:

MY_REXX_PROFILE
WANT_REXX


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.219. WANT_REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_REXX in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not Rexx macro support should be
included.

The default value for WANT_REXX is 1. Possible values are:

0         Omit support for calling Rexx macros.

1         Include support for calling Rexx macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.220. WANT_SEARCH_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_SEARCH_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Search_path() routine
should be defined in DOSUTIL.E.  The routine will be defined if either
WANT_SEARCH_PATH or USE_APPEND are set to 1. The EPATH and OPATH commands will
only be defined if both Search_path() and Get_Env() routines are defined. You
can also set WANT_SEARCH_PATH to 1 if you want to call Search_path() from your
own routines.

The default value for WANT_SEARCH_PATH is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit the routine.

1     Include the routine.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.221. WANT_SHIFT_MARKING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_SHIFT_MARKING in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for extending the
mark by pressing the Shift key during cursor movement should be included.

The default value for WANT_SHIFT_MARKING is 1. Possible values are:

0     Omit the support.

1     Include the support.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.222. WANT_STACK_CMDS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_STACK_CMDS in MYCNF.E to specify whether the stack commands (PushMark,
PopMark, SwapMark, PushPos, PopPos, and SwapPos) are defined.

The default value for WANT_STACK_CMDS is 0. Possible values are:

0         Omit the commands.

1         Define the commands.

'SWITCH'  Define the commands and add an entry to the Preferences cascade on
          the Options menu which allows selecting whether or not the commands
          will be included in the Edit menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.223. WANT_STREAM_INDENTED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_STREAM_INDENTED in MYCNF.E to specify whether lines split by the enter
key in stream mode emulation should be indented to match the previous line.

The default value for WANT_STREAM_INDENTED is 0. Possible values are:

0     Don't indent the line (true stream mode)

1     Indent the split line

Note:  If WANT_STREAM_INDENTED is set to 1, and stream mode is on, and the
       cursor is on a line containing leading spaces, then pressing Enter
       followed by Backspace will not result in effectively no change; the
       Backspace will delete one of the inserted spaces rather than joining the
       two lines.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_STREAM_MODE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.224. WANT_STREAM_MODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_STREAM_MODE in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for emulating a
stream mode editor should be included.

The default value for WANT_STREAM_MODE is 0. Possible values are:

0     Omit stream mode support.

1     Use only stream mode.

'SWITCH' Include support for both stream and line mode, and enable switching
      back and forth at runtime.

Related configuration constants:

MY_STREAM_MODE
WANT_STREAM_INDENTED


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.225. WANT_SYS_MONOSPACED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_SYS_MONOSPACED in MYCNF.E to specify that the default font should be
System Monospaced.

The default value for WANT_SYS_MONOSPACED is 0. Possible values are:

0     Use the default PM font for the default editor font.

1     Use System Monospaced as the default editor font.

Note:  The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value set in the
       Fonts page of the Settings dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.226. WANT_TAGS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_TAGS in MYCNF.E to specify whether tags file support should be
included.

The default value for WANT_TAGS is 0. Possible values are:

0       Omit tags file support

1       Include tags file support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).

'LINK'  Dynamically link TAGS.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX is
        1, then TAGS.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).

Note:  This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above. See the EPM
       5.60 / 6.00 online help for a description of what tags files are.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.227. WANT_TAB_INSERTION_TO_SPACE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_TAB_INSERTION_TO_SPACE in MYCNF.E to specify whether pressing the Tab
key while in insert mode and in line mode should insert spaces into the file or
just move the cursor to the next tab stop.  (In stream mode, pressing the Tab
key while in insert mode will always insert spaces up to the next tab stop.)

The default value for WANT_TAB_INSERTION_TO_SPACE is 0. Possible values are:

0       Pressing the Tab key in line mode will always move the cursor to the
        next tab stop.

1       Pressing the Tab key in line mode will insert spaces up to the next tab
        stop if the editor is in insert mode, and move over if in replace mode.

Related configuration constants:

TOGGLE_TAB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.228. WANT_TINY_ICONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_TINY_ICONS in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not tiny icons should be
used for the built-in toolbar.

The default value for WANT_TINY_ICONS is 0. Possible values are:

0       Use tiny icons (22x22).

1       Use standard-sized icons (in general, 48x36 for hi-resolution displays,
        and 39x29 for VGA or below).

Note:  The toolbar is only available in version 6.00 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TOOLBAR
MY_DEFAULT_TOOLBAR_FILE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.229. WANT_TOOLBAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_TOOLBAR in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for the
user-configurable toolbar should be included.

The default value for WANT_TOOLBAR is 1 for version 6.00 and above, and 0 for
earlier versions. Possible values are:

0       Omit toolbar support

1       Include toolbar support in EPM.EX.

Note:  The toolbar is only available in version 6.00 or above.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_TINY_ICONS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.230. WANT_TRUNCATED_WARNING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WANT_TRUNCATED_WARNING in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not a pop-up
warning should be presented when loading a file results in a "Lines truncated"
error.

The default value for WANT_TRUNCATED_WARNING is 0. Possible values are:

0       Don't provide a pop-up.

1       Provide a pop-up message if a "Lines truncated" error occurs, warning
        the user that saving the file could be dangerous.

Note:  The "Lines truncated" error is only given in versions below 5.60. In
       5.60 and above, the terminator of each line is remembered, and when the
       file is saved, lines that had been split will be joined back together,
       so the original file can be reproduced regardless of how long the lines
       are.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.231. WPS_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WPS_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for the Workplace
Shell Edit Object should be included.

The default value for WPS_SUPPORT is 1 for version 6.00 and above, and 0 for
earlier versions. Possible values are:

0       Omit WPS support.

1       Include WPS support in EPM.EX.

Note:  The Workplace Shell Edit Object is only available in version 6.00 or above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.232. WORD_MARK_TYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set WORD_MARK_TYPE in MYCNF.E to specify what type of mark should be used for
word marking.

The default value for WORD_MARK_TYPE is 'BLOCK'. Possible values are:

'CHAR'  Use a character mark.

'BLOCK' Use a block mark.

Related configuration constants:

WANT_CHAR_OPS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. Changing the Default Color Scheme ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default color configuration can be changed. The default colors are defined
in the bottom half of the file COLORS.E.

o Defines mnemonic constants for the color numbers, so the rest of the files
  can refer to "RED" rather than 4.
o Configures the standard colors, by defining mnemonic field names such as
  STATUSCOLOR.

The following is a listing of the defined colors in EPM:

Foreground Colors                  Background Colors
-----------------                  -----------------
BLACK          = 00                BLACKB         = 00
BLUE           = 01                BLUEB          = 16
GREEN          = 02                GREENB         = 32
CYAN           = 03                CYANB          = 48
RED            = 04                REDB           = 64
MAGENTA        = 05                MAGENTAB       = 80
BROWN          = 06                BROWNB         = 96
LIGHT_GREY     = 07                LIGHT_GREYB    =112
DARK_GREY      = 08                DARK_GREYB     =128
LIGHT_BLUE     = 09                LIGHT_BLUEB    =144
LIGHT_GREEN    = 10                LIGHT_GREENB   =160
LIGHT_CYAN     = 11                LIGHT_CYANB    =176
LIGHT_RED      = 12                LIGHT_REDB     =192
LIGHT_MAGENTA  = 13                LIGHT_MAGENTAB =208
YELLOW         = 14                YELLOWB        =224
WHITE          = 15                WHITEB         =240
                       BLINK = 128

You can override the standard colors by defining the appropriate constant in
your MYCNF.E.  See the configuration constants DRAGCOLOR, MARKCOLOR,
MESSAGECOLOR, STATUSCOLOR, and TEXTCOLOR.

MYCNF.SMP includes an example of customizing your colors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. Insert Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default insert/replace mode is set in a line which looks like:

set insert_state 1      /* default setting */
set insert_state 0      /* if you prefer replace mode */


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. EOF Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The default is that when loading a file, EPM will stop reading at the first EOF
(End-Of-File) character it encounters at the end of a line, and when saving a
file, it will write an EOF character at the end of the file. If you set EOF to
0, then when loading a file, EPM will read the file until the very end, and
keep any EOF characters it encounters (except if the last character in the file
is an EOF). When saving a file with EOF set to 0, EPM will not append an EOF
character to the end.

set EOF 1      /* Respect EOF characters */
set EOF 0      /* Treat EOF like text */


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. Join After Wrap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you type a word beyond the right margin EPM will perform automatic word
wrap; the word will be moved to the next line. In addition, if you're in insert
mode, EPM will join the next line to the wrapped word in an attempt to keep the
paragraph flowing together. To illustrate:

This is a test paragraph.  Set narrow margins,
like 'ma 1 45', go into insert mode, and type
characters into this line to cause a word wrap.
(sample next line)
If you follow the instructions you'll end up with a joined-after-wrap last
line:

wrap. (sample next line)

This behavior is useful if you're typing plain text, but can be annoying in a
SCRIPT document where the next line can contain non-text tags. The
join-after-wrap feature can be turned off with the configuration constant
MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP

Note that setting join_after_wrap is a simple assignment which can be done
anywhere in the macros. Power users might like to set the option to 0 for
SCRipt files, but 1 for all other file types. Typically this would be done in
MYSELECT.E (see the section Including New Features into the Default
Configuration for more details):

defselect
   join_after_wrap = filetype()<>'SCR'


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. Enter Key Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can easily configure the way the Enter and Ctrl-Enter keys work by setting
the ENTER_ACTION and C_ENTER_ACTION constants in MYCNF.E, or allow dynamic
changing of all the Enter key variations by setting the ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS
constant. The default action for the Enter key is to insert a new line, and the
default action for the Ctrl+Enter key is to move to the beginning of the next
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Changing the Default Window Layout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  In the current release, the Options pulldown includes a Save Options
Setting entry, which will save the current font and the status (on or off) of
the status line, message line, and scroll bars. Once you save them (in your
OS2.INI), EPM will set them to the same state every time an edit window is
opened. This is an easier way of configuring than the following, if you don't
need to recompile the macros for any other reason.

The Options pulldown contains some window features you can change. If you would
prefer for the editor to start with them different from the defaults, you can
change them in your MYMAIN.E file. These items include the size of the font
used, whether the status line, message line, and scroll bars should be
displayed.

If you prefer to have the status line off when starting EPM, add the following
line to MYMAIN.E:

'togglecontrol 7'  -- Toggle the status line

If you prefer to have the message line on when starting EPM, add the following
line to MYMAIN.E:

'togglecontrol 8'  -- Toggle the message line

If you prefer to have the scroll bars off when starting EPM, add the following
line to MYMAIN.E:

'setscrolls'  -- Toggle the scroll bars

If you want to have one on and one off, add one of the following:

'togglecontrol 9'   -- Toggle the vertical scroll bar
'togglecontrol 10'  -- Toggle the horizontal scroll bar

If you would like to maximize the window whenever EPM creates a new edit
window, then add the following code to MYMAIN.E:

call dynalink( 'PMWIN',
          'WINSETWINDOWPOS',
           gethwnd(6)              ||
           atoi(0) || atoi(3)      ||      -- HWND_TOP
           atoi(0)                 ||
           atoi(0)                 ||
           atoi(0)                 ||
           atoi(0)                 ||
           atoi(2048))                     -- SWP_MAXIMIZE
or:

call windowsize1(0, 0, 0, 0, 2048)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Recompiling Your Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How to recompile EPM macros.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. Compiling Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To compile the macros, issue this command from the OS/2 system prompt:

ETPM EPM
Use 'EPMPATH' to specify the directory containing EPM macros. If you haven't
already done so, create an EPMPATH environment variable. For example, add the
following to your CONFIG.SYS file:

SET EPMPATH=d:\EDIT\EPM;d:\EDIT\EMACROS;d:\EDIT\MYMACROS;
This assumes that you have a directory called EDIT which contains the following
subdirectories: EPM, EMACROS, and MYMACROS. In this case, you will need to
recompile as described above. EPM searches the following directories for data
files (e.g. .E and .HLP files):

 1. the current directory, and then in

 2. the directories specified by the EPMPATH environment variable (if it is
    defined), and then

 3. the directories specified by the DPATH environment variable, and then

 4. the same directory as the editor's translator program (ETPM.EXE).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1.1. Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A macro source file (ie. a .E file) must be compiled into a EPM executable file
(ie. a .EX file). If EPM is already in memory, then the new .EX file must be
loaded (LINKed) into EPM. Whenever EPM tries to load a new .EX file, it first
checks to see if it is already loaded into some edit window. If it is, EPM
checks if the file on disk is newer than the one in memory. If the dates are
the same, the copy in memory is shared. If not, EPM will load the new .ex file.
This means that even though you can't unlink the base .ex file (EPM.EX), you
can recompile it and any new edit windows you open will use the new EPM.EX,
while any existing edit windows will be unaffected. The commands that allow you
to compile macro files are:

ETPM filename                 This will compile the E macro source file
                              specified in filename into a .EX file. The new
                              .EX file will not be loaded into version of EPM
                              currently loaded into memory, and thus will not
                              be immediately available for use. If no filename
                              is specified, the MAINFILE (default EPM.E; see
                              the MAINFILEconfiguration constant) will be used.
LINK filename                 This will load the .EX file specified by filename
                              into the copy of EPM residing in memory. It will
                              not, however, recompile the .E source file.
RELINK filename               This will compile the .E file specified by
                              filename into an EPM executable .EX file and load
                              the file into the copy of EPM that currently
                              resides in memory. If no filename is specified,
                              the current file being edited will be used; if
                              modified, it will be saved before being compiled.
UNLINK filename               This will remove a previously linked .EX file
                              specified by filename from the version of EPM
                              that currently resides in memory. This is useful
                              to save memory when space is at a premium.

For example, create a file called TEST.E containing the following command
definition:

defc hello=
   messageNwait("Hello, world!")
You can keep the file in an open window for further changes (in fact this is
advisable because EPM will move the cursor to the location of any mistakes if
the file being compiled exists in the current ring).

Now press the ESCape key to bring up the command line dialog box. Type:

relink
The current filename and .E extension will automatically be appended to the
relink command. Alternatively, you could have issued the following commands:

        etpm test
        link test
If the compiler reported an error, edit TEST.E and correct any typos. Once your
macro compiles correctly, try the new command HELLO. Issue the following in the
command line dialog box:

hello
A dialog box should appear with the message "Hello, world" in it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.2. Saving Memory and Macro Complexity with the Smaller Macro Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There is an extra file distributed with the editor package called SMALL.E. This
may be used as a replacement for EPM.E. You will save about 17k of memory at
the expense of losing syntax-directed editing, all math commands, host-file
support, sorting, and the qdate/qtime commands. To activate the smaller
definitions issue the command:

ETPM small.e epm.ex
from the OS/2 prompt. You may also compile it to some name other than EPM.EX,
and thereafter load it only when desired with the /E command-line switch.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Return Codes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This variable's value is set by all commands. It will contain one of the
following error codes if the command did not succeed. It will contain 0 if the
command did succeed. See the RC command for further information.

 RC     Error strings               RC     Error strings
----  -----------------            ----  -----------------
  -2  File not found               -270  Not enough memory
  -3  Path not found               -271  Error in margin settings
  -4  Too many open files          -272  Error in tab settings
  -5  Access denied                -273  String not found
  -7  Memory control blocks        -274  Unknown command
  -8  Insufficient memory          -275  Missing filename
 -15  Invalid drive                -276  Line too long to join
 -18  No more files                -277  Too many files
 -19  Disk is write-protected      -278  Lines truncated
 -20  Unknown unit                 -279  Text already marked
 -21  Drive not ready              -280  Text not marked
 -22  Unknown command              -281  Source destination conflict
 -23  Data error (CRC)             -282  New file
 -24  Bad request structure length -283  Line mark required
 -25  Seek error                   -284  Error opening file
 -26  Unknown media type           -285  Error writing file
 -27  Sector not found             -286  Error reading file
 -28  Printer out of paper         -287  Insufficient disk space
 -29  Write fault                  -288  Block mark required
 -30  Read fault                   -289  Too many rings
 -31  General failure              -290  .ex file has incorrect version.
                                         Check EPM and ETPM versions
                                   -291  No main entry point
                                   -292  Error closing file

 -300 command line too long to shell
 -301 Cannot unlink module in use
 -302 Cannot unlink base keyset module
 -307 Link: file not found
 -308 Link: invalid filename
 -309 File already linked
 -310 Unlink: unknown module
 -311 Unlink: bad module filename
 -313 Call: unknown proc
 -314 Grep: memory error
 -315 Grep: missing [
 -316 Grep: bad range in [Alt-z]
 -317 Grep: empty []
 -318 Grep: regular expression too long
 -319 Dynalink: incorrect number of parameters
 -321 Cannot find keyset
 -322 Dynalink: unrecognized library name
 -323 Line number invalid or too large for file
 -324 Keyboard status failed
 -325 Buffer creation size too large
 -326 Dynalink: unrecognized procedure name
 -327 Too many keysets


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following operations can be performed from this dialog box:

o A previously loaded file can be loaded by choosing from the list box.
o A file can be loaded by typing the name of the file in the entry field. If
  the file entered does not exist then EPM will create it.
o You can search for a file by pressing the File list... button which will open
  the File List dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The file list dialog box is operated as follows:

o If the file is in the current directory it can be loaded by choosing it from
  the File list box.
o The directory can be changed using the Directory list box.
o The current disk drive can be changed through the Drive combination list box.
o The files listed can be constrained by selecting the applicable file type
  from the Type of file combination list box.
o The name of the file can be typed in the Open filename entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have a separate Ring pulldown, then every time you add a file to the
ring (with the Edit command) or remove a file from the ring (with the File or
Quit command), the Ring pulldown will be rebuilt. This can be slow if you have
many files in the ring. Also, the Ring pulldown is static, so it shows the ring
starting from the file that was active the last time the pulldown was built.
The List files in ring option is built dynamically every time it is called, so
it always shows the contents of the ring starting with the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

draft mode: the text will be printed in the default printer font, ignoring any
and all font and size settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NLS: National Language Support.  As used in this document, it basically refers
to the translation of text strings into other languages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WYSIWYG- What You See Is What You Get.  The printed text will look exactly like
the text on the screen, including font and size changes within the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A modification refers to a single action, whether that action is typing a
single character, deleting a section of marked text, or importing a large file
- each counts as a single change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A word is defined as any contiguous sequence of non-blank characters. (Tabs and
line-ends are treated as blanks for this purpose.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Local Area Network


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A block mark contains strictly rectangular area of text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A line mark is a mark in which the entire line from column 1 to column 255 is marked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A word mark contains only one word. Note that this is actually a special case
of a block mark.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A character mark is one which contains the stream of characters located between
two points.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For example, if the search_string is "the", the search will skip over "there"
or "rather". A potential match is considered to not be a separate word if the
preceding or following character is a letter, number, underscore (_), or dollar
sign ($). This makes it useful when searching for programming language tokens,
as well as for normal words.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An extended ASCII character can be passed as a command-line argument by
entering a string which the command recognizes and translates to the actual
internal representation.  The string can be any of the following:

a+x   Alt+X, where 'x' is any alphabetic key.

c+x   Ctrl+X, where 'x' is any alphabetic key.

Fn    Function key N, where 'n' is 1 to 12.

x+Fn  shifted Function key N, where 'n' is 1 to 12, and 'x' can be 's' for the
      Shift key, 'a' for the Alt key, and 'c' for the Ctrl key.

In the above, '+' can actually be '+', '-', or '_'.